Network+ 2005 Training & Test Preparation Guide

Network+

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Copyright© 2004 by Specialized Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. No part of this book may be used or reproduced in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without prior written permission of the publisher, except in the case of brief quotations embodied in critical articles and reviews. Making copies of any part of this book for any purpose is a violation of United States copyright laws. For further information, please write to: Publisher, c/o Specialized Solutions, Inc., 338 East Tarpon Street, Tarpon Springs, FL 34689. ISBN: 1-893596-44-3 This book is sold as is, without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, respecting the contents of this book, including but not limited to implied warranties for the books quality, performance, merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Neither Specialized Solutions, Inc., nor its authorized distributors, shall be liable to the purchaser or any other person or entity with respect to any liability, loss or damage caused, or alleged to be caused, directly or indirectly by this book. Furthermore, any mention or reference to any products does not constitute an endorsement by Specialized Solutions, Inc. Publisher: Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Contributing Writers: Bill Ferguson Richard Harrison Garrett Smiley Editor: Bill Ferguson

Trademark Acknowledgments Brands and product names cited in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks held by their respective companies. Any use of a term in this book should not be regarded as affecting the validity of any trademark or service mark. Suggestions/Comments Please forward all comments or suggestions to: Specialized Solutions, Inc. 338 East Tarpon St. Tarpon Springs, FL 34689

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS .......................................................................................................... I

ABOUT SPECIALIZED SOLUTIONS ...........................................................IX
INTRODUCTION...............................................................................................................1 COMPTIA TEST OBJECTIVES FOR NETWORK+ .............................................................2005 STUDY PLAN STRATEGIES ..................................................................................................9 YOUR VIDEO INSTRUCTOR .................................................................................................9 HOW TO TAKE THE TEST ..................................................................................................10 Who may take the test? ...............................................................................................10 How to Prepare to Ensure Exam Success...................................................................10 ABOUT THIS COURSE .......................................................................................................13 CHAPTER 1 – NETWORKING FUNDAMENTALS ..................................................17 INTRODUCTION TO NETWORKING ....................................................................................17 Benefits of Networking Computers .............................................................................17 Local Area Networks (LAN) and Wide Area Networks (WAN) .................................18 The Client/Server Relationship ...................................................................................19 Client/Server Networking............................................................................................19 Peer-to-Peer Networking ............................................................................................20 BASIC NETWORK STRUCTURE (TOPOLOGY).....................................................................21 Bus Topology ..............................................................................................................21 Star Topology..............................................................................................................22 Ring Topology.............................................................................................................22 SPECIAL TOPOLOGIES ......................................................................................................23 Hybrid Topologies ......................................................................................................23 Mesh Topology............................................................................................................23 Wireless Topology.......................................................................................................24 NETWORK ACCESS ...........................................................................................................26 Token Passing .............................................................................................................26 Ethernet.......................................................................................................................26 Fast Ethernet...............................................................................................................27 HUBS AND CONCENTRATORS ...........................................................................................28 Passive Hubs...............................................................................................................28 Active Hubs .................................................................................................................29 Hub-Based Networks ..................................................................................................29 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................30 KEYWORDS EXERCISE .................................................................................................31 REVIEW QUESTIONS - CHAPTER 1 ....................................................................................33 CHAPTER 2 - NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEMS (NOS) ....................................35 WHAT IS AN OPERATING SYSTEM? ..................................................................................35 Preemptive vs. Non-preemptive Multitasking .............................................................36 WHAT IS A NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEM (NOS)? ........................................................37 Peer-to-Peer LANs......................................................................................................37 Server/Client Software ................................................................................................39 NOS PACKAGES...............................................................................................................42 Specialized Solutions, Inc. i

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Novell NetWare .......................................................................................................... 42 Microsoft Windows NT Network Operating System................................................... 45 Windows NT Minimum Requirements ...........................Error! Bookmark not defined. UNIX Operating Systems............................................................................................ 47 Banyan VINES (Virtual Integrated Network Service)................................................ 48 SUMMARY ....................................................................................................................... 50 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ................................................................................................. 51 REVIEW QUESTIONS ........................................................................................................ 52 CHAPTER 3- THE OSI MODEL AND COMMUNICATION STANDARDS.......... 55 THE SEVEN LAYERS OF NETWORK COMMUNICATION ..................................................... 55 SEVEN LAYERS OF THE OSI MODEL ................................................................................ 56 Application Layer ....................................................................................................... 56 Presentation Layer ..................................................................................................... 57 Session Layer.............................................................................................................. 57 Transport Layer.......................................................................................................... 57 Network Layer ............................................................................................................ 58 Data Link Layer.......................................................................................................... 58 Logical Link Control (LLC) ....................................................................................... 59 Media Access Control (MAC) .................................................................................... 59 Physical Layer............................................................................................................ 60 PROTOCOL STACKS ......................................................................................................... 62 Communication Between Peer Layers ....................................................................... 62 OSI AND THE REAL WORLD ............................................................................................ 64 DEVICES AND THE OSI MODEL ....................................................................................... 66 Repeaters .................................................................................................................... 66 Bridges........................................................................................................................ 66 Routers........................................................................................................................ 66 Brouters ...................................................................................................................... 67 Gateways .................................................................................................................... 67 IEEE 802 STANDARDS .................................................................................................... 68 NETWORK DRIVERS AND THE OSI MODEL ...................................................................... 70 NDIS (Network Driver Interface Specification)......................................................... 70 ODI (Open Data Link Interface) ................................................................................ 70 PROTOCOLS AND OSI ...................................................................................................... 70 Protocol Binding ........................................................................................................ 71 Connection-Oriented vs. Connectionless ................................................................... 71 Routable vs. Non-Routable Protocols ........................................................................ 71 Networking Protocols and Stacks............................................................................... 72 AppleTalk.................................................................................................................... 73 DECnet ....................................................................................................................... 73 IPX/ SPX..................................................................................................................... 73 SMB (Server Message Block) ..................................................................................... 74 SNA (Systems Network Architecture) ......................................................................... 74 TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) ....................................................................... 74 IP (Internet Protocol)................................................................................................. 74 UDP (User Datagram Protocol)................................................................................ 74 FTP (File Transfer Protocol) ..................................................................................... 74 ii Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Table of Contents Telnet...........................................................................................................................75 NFS (Network File System).........................................................................................75 SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)......................................................................75 RIP (Routing Information Protocol)...........................................................................75 NTP (Network Time Protocol) ....................................................................................75 OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) ...............................................................................75 ARP (Address Resolution Protocol)............................................................................75 X.25 .............................................................................................................................76 XNS (Xerox Network System)......................................................................................76 Non-Routable Protocols..............................................................................................76 DLC (Data Link Control)............................................................................................76 LAT (Local Area Transport) .......................................................................................76 NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)............................................................77 Other Protocols...........................................................................................................78 SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol)...........................................................................78 PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) ...................................................................................78 PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) ................................................................78 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) ........................................................78 ISO/OSI Standard .......................................................................................................78 ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) ...............................................................78 DNS (Domain Name System) ......................................................................................78 XDR (External Data Representation) .........................................................................78 RPC (Remote Procedure Call)....................................................................................78 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................80 KEYWORDS EXERCISE .................................................................................................81 REVIEW QUESTIONS – CHAPTER 3 ...................................................................................82 CHAPTER 4 - HARDWARE MEDIA AND PERIPHERALS.....................................85 NETWORK CABLING .........................................................................................................85 Coaxial Cable .............................................................................................................85 Coaxial Connectors ....................................................................................................86 Twisted-Pair Cable .....................................................................................................88 Fiber-Optic Cable.......................................................................................................91 IBM Cabling................................................................................................................91 Summary of Cabling ...................................................................................................93 CABLING TERMS ..............................................................................................................94 AWG (American Wire Gauge) ....................................................................................94 Bandwidth ...................................................................................................................94 Plenum Grade Cabling ...............................................................................................94 Selecting Cables..........................................................................................................95 NETWORK INTERFACE CARDS (NICS)..............................................................................97 Preparing the Data .....................................................................................................97 Signals and Clocking ..................................................................................................97 Network Addressing/MAC Address.............................................................................98 DMA (Direct Memory Channel) .................................................................................98 Controlling the Data Flow..........................................................................................98 Configurable Options..................................................................................................98 Wireless NICs............................................................................................................100 Specialized Solutions, Inc. iii

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Fiber-Optic NICs...................................................................................................... 100 DATA BUS ARCHITECTURE ............................................................................................ 101 Standard Bus Types .................................................................................................. 101 Laptops ..................................................................................................................... 101 NETWORK PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................. 102 WIRELESS NETWORKS ................................................................................................... 103 Why Wireless? .......................................................................................................... 103 Wireless Transmission Methods............................................................................... 104 Radio Transmission.................................................................................................. 105 Satellite Station Networking..................................................................................... 106 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................... 108 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ............................................................................................... 109 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 4.................................................................................... 112 CHAPTER 5 – NETWORK PROTOCOLS & STANDARDS .................................. 115 ACCESS METHODS......................................................................................................... 116 CSMA/CD (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) .................... 116 CSMA/CA (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance) ................... 117 Token Passing........................................................................................................... 117 Demand Priority....................................................................................................... 117 NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS (FRAMES AND PACKETS) ............................................... 119 Packet Structure ....................................................................................................... 119 Packet Components .................................................................................................. 120 NETWORK STANDARDS ................................................................................................. 122 Logical Link Control (802.2).................................................................................... 122 Ethernet (802.3)........................................................................................................ 122 AppleTalk.................................................................................................................. 129 ARCNet ( Attached Resource Computer Network)................................................... 131 SUMMARY ..................................................................................................................... 133 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ............................................................................................... 134 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 5.................................................................................... 136 CHAPTER 6 – NETWORK DESIGN.......................................................................... 139 STARTING A NETWORK PROJECT ................................................................................... 139 The Customer ........................................................................................................... 139 The Network Goals................................................................................................... 140 DETERMINE NETWORK TYPE ......................................................................................... 142 When to Choose Peer-to-Peer.................................................................................. 142 When to Choose Client/Server ................................................................................. 143 Making the Choice.................................................................................................... 144 Public and Private networks .................................................................................... 144 DESIGN THE NETWORK.................................................................................................. 150 Media Selection ........................................................................................................ 151 Environmental Concerns.......................................................................................... 152 NOS Selection........................................................................................................... 152 Protocol Selection .................................................................................................... 152 PUTTING IT ALL TOGETHER ............................................................................................ 154 Cable to Computer ................................................................................................... 154 iv Specialized Solutions, Inc.

........................................................170 Circuit-switched Networks.....................................................................................................165 WHEN A LAN IS TOO SMALL ..............................................................................................165 EXPANDING A LAN WITH HUBS............182 Limitations of RAS ................................................................................................................................................................................................159 PREVENTING COMPATIBILITY PROBLEMS .......................................................................167 Gateway .......................................................................................169 Analog Connectivity..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................160 RESOLVING COMPATIBILITY PROBLEMS ..............................................................................................160 Standards ..........................EXPANDING A NETWORK .................................................166 Bridges .............................................. Inc..................................................................................160 Hard Work .......................................................................................................................................................................................166 Repeaters...........................................................................................................166 Routers ..........................................................................................................................178 Connecting Two Computers...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................189 INTRODUCTION TO TCP/IP...162 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 6 .......................................178 RAS Protocols .................................................................................................................194 NAMING SYSTEMS ........................................................................172 VLAN.................186 CHAPTER 8 – TCP/IP ESSENTIALS .....................................................................179 Installing and Configuring RAS....................................................................................................................192 Other TCP/IP Protocols ...................197 DNS ...........168 Carriers.....................................................................167 CONNECTION SERVICES ................................................157 Adapter Card Compatibility ........................................197 Specialized Solutions...................................159 Computer Compatibility......................................................................................................183 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ........................................................................................176 REMOTE ACCESS COMPUTING (RAS) .............................................................169 Digital Connectivity ...........................................154 Network Adapter Cards ...............157 Media Compatibility ...................................................................................................................................................................168 WAN Overview.Table of Contents Cable to Hub ......................................................................................................189 TCP/IP PROTOCOLS ................................................................................................173 Advanced WAN Environments ........................................189 RFC (Request For Comments).........................................................................................................................182 Troubleshooting a RAS setup.....161 HCL and Windows 2000 .......................174 MODEMS .......................................................164 CHAPTER 7 ..........................................................161 Minimum Requirements ................................................................. v ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................172 Packet Switching Networks...........................................................................................................................................................................155 NETWORK AND HARDWARE COMPATIBILITY .............................................................192 The Top Five TCP/IP Protocols ............................................184 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 7 .......................................................................................................................

.................................. 225 IFCONFIG................. 202 IPv4 .............. 199 BOOTP ................... 225 NSLOOKUP..................................................................................................................................................................................... 205 SUBNETTING ............................................................................................................................................................................. 219 CHAPTER 9 – TCP/IP UTILITIES......................................................................................................... 198 NETBIOS .............. 200 IP Proxy Servers............... 223 TRACERT............................... 228 CHAPTER 10 – NETWORK SECURITY .................................... 207 How to Subdivide a Network .......................... 198 HOSTS file........................................ 222 Communities.......................................................................................................... 199 DHCP ................................................................ 223 NBTSTAT ............................................................... 203 Class C Addresses ................................................................................................................................................................ 215 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ................................................................................................................................................................ 227 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 9................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 199 LMHOSTS file ........................................................................ 221 NETWORK MANAGERS ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 203 IPv6 (IP Next Generation) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 225 PING............................................................................................................................................................ 209 TCP/IP CONFIGURATION CONCEPTS .................... 223 TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS ...... 229 vi Specialized Solutions........................ 225 ARP ....... 221 Management Software...................................................................................................... 222 EVENT VIEWER ............................................................................................................................................................................ 225 IPCONFIG/WINIPCFG ............................ 225 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ............................................................................................................................................ 223 ROUTE. 200 NAT................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 202 IP Addresses ................................................................................................................................. 222 VALIDATION TOOLS ....................... 203 Class A Addresses ....................... 225 RARP...................................................................................................... 217 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 8......... 221 Agent Software ................................................................................................................ 200 ICS ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Inc..................................................... 203 Class B Addresses ............................................................ 199 NETWORK CONNECTION UTILITIES ............................................................................................................................. 199 IP Gateway .................................................................................................... 223 NETSTAT ................................... 203 Class D and Class E Addresses......................................................................... .............................. 229 USER AND SHARE LEVEL ....................SNMP .........Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide WINS................................................................ 200 TCP/IP ADDRESSING........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................................263 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 11 ......................................................................................267 COAXIAL CABLE TYPES .......................................................................................269 IBM CABLE TYPES (TOKEN RING) .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................275 TCP/IP UTILITIES ...............................................................................................232 Blocking Port Numbers................................................259 NIC Indicator Lights .................................234 Fault Tolerance and Power ...............229 Share-level Security .............................................................................................................................................257 Misbehaving Protocols ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................267 ETHERNET CABLING ............234 Fault Tolerance and RAID.......................................................................................271 OSI MODEL .........................................................................239 Viruses.................Table of Contents User-level Security.............................................243 CHAPTER 11 – TROUBLESHOOTING A NETWORK ...........................................................................260 Performance................................................260 Name Resolution ...........................................................274 TCP/IP PORTS ..................269 IEEE 802...........................................................................................................................................................................................................267 5-4-3 RULE ........................................................................250 Hardware Networking Tools......................................264 APPENDIX A – TECH SUMMARY ......................................................................268 UTP CABLE CATEGORIES ............................................................................................250 Hardware Troubleshooting Tools...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................275 Specialized Solutions.....................................234 Full.264 CONCLUSION ............................238 Disaster Recovery ....................................237 Encryption.................................................................................................................................................233 Backup Software ......................................................232 Firewalls ...................................239 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Inc.......................................................................................245 BASIC TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................................................230 SECURITY TECHNIQUES .......257 Cable Problems.........273 SUBNET MASKING .................................................................................................................... and Incremental Backups ...............................................242 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 10 ....................................................................................................................................................................................232 Backup Options.................................................................................................................................................234 Volumes.260 KEYWORDS EXERCISE ............... Differential.................................................................................................................................251 MAINTAINING AND TROUBLESHOOTING NETWORKS ....270 IRQ ASSIGNMENTS ............................................................................................255 TROUBLESHOOTING SCENARIOS ........................................................................232 Backing up Data ......................................X STANDARDS.236 PASSWORD PRACTICES AND PROCEDURES ........................................................................................................................................................................................... vii .......................................................245 NETWORKING AND TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS .......

.................................................................................................................. 319 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 10........................................................................................ 316 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 8................................................................................................................................... 281 APPENDIX C – NETWORK STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONS ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 323 viii Specialized Solutions........................................................................................................................................................... 283 IEEE ........................................................................................................... 281 NOVELL ....................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................... 281 MICROSOFT: .................................................................... 321 INDEX ......................................................................... 303 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 1.................................................................................................................................... 283 ANSI.......... ERROR! BOOKMARK NOT DEFINED....... 311 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 6...................................................................................................................... 315 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 7................ 276 TRANSMISSION MEDIA .................................................................................................................. 318 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 9............................................. 278 APPENDIX B – USEFUL WEB SITES ................................................................................................................................. 278 TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS ............................................................................................ Inc..................................................... 304 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 3....................................................................................................................................................................... 320 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 11................................................................................ 303 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 2................................................................. 306 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 4..................................................................................... 284 APPENDIX D – HOW TO REGISTER FOR THE EXAM.............................................................................................. 285 APPENDIX E – GLOSSARY..................... 309 REVIEW QUESTIONS CHAPTER 5.............................................................................................Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide TOPOLOGY REVIEW ................................................................... 284 SAG ......................... 283 CCITT ...................................... 287 APPENDIX F – CHAPTER REVIEW QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS ............................. 283 EIA ............ 285 TO REGISTER FOR THE NETWORK+ EXAMS .......................................................................................................... 281 COMPUSERVE .................... 284 ISO....................... OTHER HELPFUL SITES ..

Inc. is dedicated to providing the computer professional the highest level of self-study training and certification materials the industry has to offer. We thank you for choosing our company as your resource for Information Technology SelfStudy Training. ix . One hundred percent customer satisfaction and unmatched customer service is always our commitment to the computer professional.specializedsolutions. We are committed to always be on the leading edge of new computer environment training products. Inc.com Specialized Solutions. We strive to provide training programs that far exceed the expectations of our customers. Inc. cost-effective programs that are customized to suit your needs. To see other Specialized Solutions.About Specialized Solutions About Specialized Solutions Welcome to Specialized Solutions. course offerings. We will always provide a quality product to customers at a price that is within reach of most computer professionals. Inc.’s Network+ training and certification course. Specialized Solutions. Our highly skilled staff of computer and educational professionals are dedicated to delivering high quality. please visit us at: www.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide x Specialized Solutions. . Inc.

Computer Graphics Experts. Network+ video training series. It can be used in conjunction with the Specialized Solutions. Technical Editors.Introduction Introduction This Training Guide is designed to meet all of the Network+ exam objectives. our success is directly tied to the success our students have with our training programs. We hope you enjoy your Network+ training program. 1 . easy to follow format. Technical Writers. Inc. Remember. Our staff consists of Microsoft Certified Professionals. as a stand-alone textbook. or as a textbook in a classroom environment. Inc. We are here to help with all of your training and certification needs! Specialized Solutions. We have carefully prepared this multi-media training material to provide you with the needed information in a logical. at Specialized Solutions. and Digital Video Studio Professionals.

0 Network Implementation 4.” The objectives are weighted in the following manner: NETWORK+ CERTIFICATION DOMAIN AREAS 1.0 Network Support Total % OF EXAMINATION 20% 20% 25% 35% 100% 2 Specialized Solutions. test objectives and example content. Inc.0 Protocols & Standards 3.” “This examination includes blueprint weighting.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide CompTIA Test Objectives for Network+ CompTIA is an acronym for Computing Technology Industry Association “The skills and knowledge measured by this examination are derived from industry-wide job task analysis and validated through an industry wide survey. Example concepts are included to clarify the test objectives and should not be construed as a comprehensive listing of the content of the examination.0 Media & Topologies 2. . The results of this survey were used in weighing the domains and ensuring that the weighting is representative of the relative importance of the content.

5 Recognize the following media types and describe their uses: • Category 3.Introduction The following is a further breakdown of the specific areas covered on the Network+ exam: Domain 1.4 Recognize the following media connectors and describe their uses: • RJ-11 (Registered Jack) • RJ-45 (Registered Jack) • F-Type • ST (Straight Tip) • SC (Subscriber Connector or Standard Connector) • IEEE 1394 (FireWire) • Fiber LC (Local Connector) • MT-RJ (Mechanical Transfer Registered Jack) • USB (Universal Serial Bus) 1. 5e. 1000BASE-CX.1 Recognize the following logical or physical network topologies given a diagram. and cable type) of the following cable standards: • 10BASE-T and 10BASE-FL • 100BASE-TX and 100BASE-FX • 1000BASE-T.0 . topology. Inc.Media and Topologies – 20% 1. 802.6 Identify the purposes. length. 5.5 (token ring). 802. and FDDI (Fiber Distributed Data Interface) networking technologies. schematic or description: • Star • Bus • Mesh • Ring 1. 802.3 (Ethernet). 10 GBASE-LR and 10 GBASE-ER 1.2 Specify the main features of 802. and 6 • UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair) • STP (Shielded Twisted Pair) • Coaxial cable • SMF (Single Mode Fiber) optic cable • MMF (Multimode Fiber) optic cable 1. 3 . 1000BASE-SX and 1000BASE-LX • 10 GBASE-SR.2 (Logical Link Control).3 Specify the characteristics (For example: speed. features and functions of the following network components: • Hubs • Switches • Bridges • Routers • Gateways • CSU / DSU (Channel Service Unit / Data Service Unit) Specialized Solutions.11 (wireless). including: • Speed • Access method (CSMA / CA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Avoidance) and CSMA / CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access / Collision Detection)) • Topology • Media 1.

10 Define the purpose.9 Identify and differentiate between the following IP (Internet Protocol) addressing methods: • Static • Dynamic • Self-assigned (APIPA (Automatic Private Internet Protocol Addressing)) 2. Domain 2. B and C).5 Identify the components and structure of IP (Internet Protocol) addresses (IPv4. IPv6) and the required setting for connections across the Internet. 2.2 Identify the seven layers of the OSI (Open Systems Interconnect) model and their functions.4 Differentiate between the following network protocols in terms of routing.6 Identify classful IP (Internet Protocol) ranges and their subnet masks (For example: Class A. . transmission type and topology) of the following wireless technologies: • 802. 2. antenna type and environmental factors). Inc. addressing schemes. frequency.3 Identify the OSI (Open Systems Interconnect) layers at which the following network components operate: • Hubs • Switches • Bridges • Routers • NICs (Network Interface Card) • WAPs (Wireless Access Point) 2.1 Identify a MAC (Media Access Control) address and its parts.8 Identify the differences between private and public network addressing schemes. function and use of the following protocols used in the TCP / IP (Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol) suite: • TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) • UDP (User Datagram Protocol) 4 Specialized Solutions. interoperability and naming conventions: • IPX / SPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange / Sequence Packet Exchange) • NetBEUI (Network Basic Input / Output System Extended User Interface) • AppleTalk / AppleTalk over IP (Internet Protocol) • TCP / IP (Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol) 2. 2.7 Specify the general characteristics (For example: carrier speed.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide • NICs (Network Interface Card) • ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) adapters • WAPs (Wireless Access Point) • Modems • Transceivers (media converters) • Firewalls 1.8 Identify factors which affect the range and speed of wireless service (For example: interference. 2. 2.11 (Frequency hopping spread spectrum) • 802.11x (Direct sequence spread spectrum) • Infrared • Bluetooth 1.0 – Protocols and Standards – 20% 2.7 Identify the purpose of subnetting. 2.

WINS (Windows Internet Name Service).14 Identify the basic characteristics (For example: speed.Introduction • FTP (File Transfer Protocol) • SFTP (Secure File Transfer Protocol) • TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) • SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) • HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) • HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) • POP3 / IMAP4 (Post Office Protocol version 3 / Internet Message Access Protocol version 4) • Telnet • SSH (Secure Shell) • ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) • ARP / RARP (Address Resolution Protocol / Reverse Address Resolution Protocol) • NTP (Network Time Protocol) • NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) • SCP (Secure Copy Protocol) • LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) • IGMP (Internet Group Multicast Protocol) • LPR (Line Printer Remote) 2.11 Define the function of TCP / UDP (Transmission Control Protocol / User Datagram Protocol) ports. NAT (Network Address Translation). LPD (Line Printer Daemon) and Samba). SMB (Server Message Block). 2. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol).12 Identify the well-known ports associated with the following commonly used services and protocols: • 20 FTP (File Transfer Protocol) • 21 FTP (File Transfer Protocol) • 22 SSH (Secure Shell) • 23 Telnet • 25 SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) • 53 DNS (Domain Name Service) • 69 TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) • 80 HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) • 110 POP3 (Post Office Protocol version 3) • 119 NNTP (Network News Transport Protocol) • 123 NTP (Network Time Protocol) • 143 IMAP4 (Internet Message Access Protocol version 4) • 443 HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure) 2.13 Identify the purpose of network services and protocols (For example: DNS (Domain Name Service).15 Identify the basic characteristics of the following internet access technologies: • xDSL (Digital Subscriber Line) • Broadband Cable (Cable modem) • POTS / PSTN (Plain Old Telephone Service / Public Switched Telephone Network) • Satellite • Wireless Specialized Solutions. 5 . capacity and media) of the following WAN (Wide Area Networks) technologies: • Packet switching • Circuit switching • ISDN (Integrated Services Digital Network) • FDDI (Fiber Distributed Data Interface) • T1 (T Carrier level 1) / E1 / J1 • T3 (T Carrier level 3) / E3 / J3 • OCx (Optical Carrier) • X.25 2. Zeroconf (Zero configuration). ICS (Internet Connection Sharing). Inc. 2. NFS (Network File System). AFP (Apple File Protocol).

RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service).7 Given a connectivity scenario. 6 Specialized Solutions. benefits and characteristics of using a firewall. file and print services.1x 2. application support and security) of the following server operating systems to access network resources: • UNIX / Linux / Mac OS X Server • Netware • Windows • Appleshare IP (Internet Protocol) 3. configure the connection. network protocols and peer and server services). 3. Includes connection to the following servers: • UNIX / Linux / MAC OS X Server • Netware • Windows • Appleshare IP (Internet Protocol) 3.4 Given a remote connectivity scenario comprised of a protocol. punch down tool or tone generator).2 Identify the basic capabilities needed for client workstations to connect to and use network resources (For example: media. media tester / certifier.3 Identify the appropriate tool for a given wiring task (For example: wire crimper.18 Identify authentication protocols (For example: CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol).8 Identify the main characteristics of VLANs (Virtual Local Area Networks). benefits and characteristics of using a proxy service.17 Identify the following security protocols and describe their purpose and function: • IPSec (Internet Protocol Security) • L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol) • SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) • WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) Continued on the next page… Continued from the previous page… • WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) • 802.5 Identify the purpose. and physical connectivity. Kerberos and EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol)). 3.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 2. 3. 3. 3.0 Network Implementation – 25% 3.9 Identify the main characteristics and purpose of extranets and intranets. . authentication and encryption). an authentication scheme. Inc. authentication. determine the impact on network functionality of a particular security implementation (For example: port blocking / filtering. interoperability. PAP (Password Authentication Protocol).6 Identify the purpose. 3.16 Define the function of the following remote access protocols and services: • RAS (Remote Access Service) • PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) • SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol) • PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet) • PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) • VPN (Virtual Private Network) • RDP (Remote Desktop Protocol) 2.1 Identify the basic capabilities (For example: client support. Domain 3. MS-CHAP (Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol).

network hardware or environment).2 Given output from a network diagnostic utility (For example: those utilities listed in objective 4.3 Given a network scenario.4 Given a troubleshooting scenario involving a client accessing remote network services. determine the impact of modifying. authentication failure. identify the cause of a stated problem: • UNIX / Linux / Mac OS X Server • Netware • Windows • Appleshare IP (Internet Protocol) 4. adding or removing network services (For example: DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). interpret visual indicators (For example: link LEDs (Light Emitting Diode) and collision LEDs (Light Emitting Diode)) to determine the nature of a stated problem.6 Given a scenario. Specialized Solutions.7 Given a troubleshooting scenario involving a network with a particular physical topology (For example: bus.Introduction 3.8 Given a network troubleshooting scenario involving an infrastructure (For example: wired or wireless) problem. identify the cause of a stated problem (For example: bad media.10 Identify the purpose. physical connectivity and SOHO (Small Office / Home Office) router).5 Given a troubleshooting scenario between a client and the following server environments. select the appropriate network utility from the following: • Tracert / traceroute • ping • arp • netstat • nbtstat • ipconfig / ifconfig • winipcfg • nslookup / dig 4.1 Given a troubleshooting scenario. identify the network area affected and the cause of the stated failure. print services.12 Identify the purpose and characteristics of disaster recovery: • Backup / restore • Offsite storage • Hot and cold spares • Hot. 3. 4. warm and cold sites Domain 4. 4. 4. star. 4. Inc. 7 . identify the cause of the problem (For example: file services. mesh or ring) and including a network diagram. protocol configuration.1).11 Identify the purpose and characteristics of fault tolerance: • Power • Link redundancy • Storage • Services 3. identify the utility and interpret the output.0 Network Support – 35% 4. interference. 4. benefits and characteristics of using antivirus software. DNS (Domain Name Service) and WINS (Windows Internet Name Service)) for network resources and users.

Establish what has changed 4.9 Given a network problem scenario. Test the result 7. select an appropriate course of action based on a logical troubleshooting strategy. . Document the solution and process 8 Specialized Solutions. This strategy can include the following steps: 1.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 4. Identify the symptoms and potential causes 2. Select the most probable cause 5. Inc. Identify the results and effects of the solution 8. Implement an action plan and solution including potential effects 6. Identify the affected area 3.

not all concepts and functions can be performed on a workstation. Suggestion: • • • • • • • Watch each video segment with the study guide in hand. Alabama. it may seem so. Network+. such as the one suggested below: You can maximize your multi-media learning experience by using all of the courseware materials as you study for your certification. Pause and rewind to review the concepts as often as necessary. Use the Practice Exam Simulator to test your knowledge. as well as “Designing Security for Windows Server 2003 Network” for Exam Cram2. Server+. Make notes in the study guide as necessary for your understanding.Introduction Study Plan Strategies The material in Network+ is not extremely complicated. Hands-on experience is best. This combination of resources will provide a thorough understanding of the concept or function being presented. and Security+. In addition he holds the CompTIA certifications of A+. Use the “Help” button where available. However. He is certified as an MCT. MCDST. MCSE. if this is your first exposure to networking. teaching classes for most of the national training companies and some regional training companies.” Specialized Solutions. Bill now runs his own company as an independent contractor in Birmingham. “My job is to understand the material so well that I can make it easier for my students to learn than it was for me to learn. use a study plan. Bill has written the “MCDST Study Guide” for Sybex Inc. CCSI. To get the best results from your training. Your Video Instructor Your video instructor is Bill Ferguson. and CCNA. 9 . Complete the questions and exercises at the end of each segment of this study guide and in the textbook. MCSA. Bill made his transition to Certified Technical Trainer in 1997 with ExecuTrain. Bill says. Bill has been in the computer industry for over 15 years. In addition. Practice the function on your computer. Inc. Bill is an enthusiastic. MCP+I. Originally in technical sales and sales management with Sprint. results oriented computer specialist who has extensive knowledge of Microsoft networks.

CONGRATULATIONS. Since most of us learn in different ways. A typical candidate would have A+ certification or equivalent knowledge. Read through these suggested steps and modify it as necessary to meet your needs. • • • How do you learn best (reading. watching. The exam is targeted for technicians with 18-24 months experience in the IT industry. This method is based on utilization of several learning skills. Certification exams are becoming more and more comprehensive. You can take the test at any Virtual University Enterprises testing center (vue.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide How to Take the Test Passing a certification exam takes more than just skimming through a book. French and Japanese.com) or any Thomson Prometric testing center (2test. but A+ certification is not required. hearing or doing)? What time of day is best for you (night person/morning person)? What are your limits before you get bored (or fall asleep)? 10 Specialized Solutions. There are no specific requirements. The Network+ exam was launched worldwide April 30. You can locate a testing center and schedule the test on the web. Inc. This helps to ensure that a person who has earned the certification actually understands the concepts and functions of networking versus simply memorizing definitions. except payment of the test fee. You can also call VUE at 877-551-7587 or Thomson Prometric at 888-8956116. You may be surprised at how near you are to a testing center! Evaluate your learning aptitudes. German. 1999. The Network+ test is currently available throughout the world in English. The following is a suggestion you may find helpful. Step 1 – Prepare for the Training Obtain the best possible materials and instruction you can find. . Prometric and VUE testing centers administer the exam.com). YOU’VE COMPLETED THE 1ST STEP BY SELECTING SPECIALIZED SOLUTIONS TO BE YOUR TRAINING PARTNER! Schedule the test for a few weeks from now so that you will have a guidepost that is constantly reminding you that you need to study the material. How to Prepare to Ensure Exam Success There are many ways to prepare for the exam. Who may take the test? Network+ is open to anyone who wants to take the test. there is no one method that will work for everyone.

11 . You will be surprised at how much more sense it makes this time. It is not necessary to memorize or even understand the material at this point. Evaluate your active schedule – determine when you have some free time. If you don’t have any free time – MAKE SOME! Be committed to your plan! Step 2 – Do the Coursework (Text and Videos/CDs) Your objective is to get an understanding of the material and the scope of the course. What you learned in the later chapters may help you get a better understanding of the material the second time through. Review the video presentation one more time if necessary. You will also “pick up” some concepts that you missed the first time through. Use the rewind button as often as necessary. Focus on the areas that you had trouble with the first time. Re-read the test and review the video presentation. Inc. Put it on your calendar and keep it! The time it takes you to read the text may be different from the time needed to watch the video or do the practice exercises. • Complete the course a second time. you want to begin to understand. Your objective is to own the information (make it part of you). Make an appointment with yourself. Read through the text to get an understanding of the material. At this time. set aside the time to learn. Complete the entire course one time through using the following methods: • • Break the course down into bite size chunks (a chapter or two at a time). This workbook will make this task much easier. just get a feel for it. Based on your time to learn (and your schedule).Introduction Make a plan to learn. Specialized Solutions. If you need to. go though the entire course again. Watch the videos that correspond to the chapters you read.

Step 4 – Take the Certification Exam As you prepare for your certification exam it will be helpful to know what to expect when you arrive at the testing center: • • You will be asked to sign the logbook upon arrival and upon departure.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Step 3 – Prepare for the Network+ Exam Place the practice exam simulator in your computer’s CD-ROM and select the exam you wish to take or practice with. . Evaluate the questions you missed. it might be a good idea to take advantage of this feature. including one photo ID. (the sample test is unrelated to the Network+ exam) to give you a feel for how the test is conducted. indicating that you understand the regulations and will comply with them. If you have never taken one of these computergenerated exams. You will be provided with a set amount of scratch paper or a small dry erase board for use during the exam. • • • • Did you understand the questions? Did you misinterpret or read more into it than was there? Did you understand the material? Did you read the whole question? Study the areas that you are weak in. Continue retaking the practice exams and studying the areas that require improvement until you are consistently scoring in the 90% range on the practice exam. You may not use a laptop computer or have any notes or printed material with you during the exam session. All scratch paper or boards are collected at the end of the exam. You will have the opportunity to take a sample test. It is a closed book exam. • • • • 12 Specialized Solutions. The test administrator will show you to your test computer and will handle any preparations necessary to start the testing tool and display the exam on the computer. You will be required to show two forms of identification. which explains the rules you will be expected to comply with during the test. Inc. (such as a driver’s license or company security ID) before you take the exam. The test administrator will give you a Testing Center Regulations form. You will be asked to sign the form.

guess. jotting down their notes on the scratch paper that the testing facility provides. If you positively don’t know the answer. mark it and come back to it. Before you begin the exam the test administrator will tell you what to do when you complete the exam. It lists your score by objective. a Network+ Training & Test Preparation Guide and a practice exam simulator. Specialized Solutions. An unanswered question is always wrong! Stay calm. ask the administrator BEFORE beginning the exam. Do not read too much into the question. The course contains five instructor led CD-ROMs. you are given the ability to skip a question. If the administrator does not do this. (You don’t need to send them the score report. or if you are unclear about what you should do. Before retaking the exam. answer the question. At the end of the exam you will be able to see which ones are answered. If you don’t know the answer. which will enable you to see which areas require improvement if you didn’t pass. you can see which questions are not answered. Make sure ALL questions are answered BEFORE you exit the test!) When you’ve completed the test and exit the system. put in extra study time in the objective areas that need improvement. (At the end of the test when you have the opportunity to review. If you know the answer. you are given immediate online pass/fail notification and your score. The testing center will notify CompTIA of your score and they will confirm your certification with you. Keep track of the time and pace yourself. 13 . self-study training system. You will also receive a printed Examination Score Report indicating your pass or fail status from the test administrator. marked or skipped. (such as the RAID and SCSI Information) just before entering the exam site and then immediately upon starting the test.) If you don’t receive a passing score: If you do not receive a passing score. Make sure to note if it is a multiple answer question and select the correct amount of answers. Sometimes later questions will help answer earlier questions. You will have plenty of time as long as you use it wisely.Introduction HINT . skip it. but be sure to read it in its entirety. Usually. Inc. If you’re not quite sure. Please note: YOU MUST PAY FOR EACH EXAM RETAKE! About This Course This Specialized Solutions Network+ course is a multi-media. mark a question or answer a question. Trust your first instinct about an answer! Go back and answer any marked or unanswered questions.Some people find it helpful to study the memorization type materials. you may call an authorized testing center to schedule a time to retake the exam.

Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide The Video Chapters Include: CD 1: Introduction and Overview Network Topologies Network Technologies Cable Standards Media Connectors CD 2: Media Types Network Components Wireless Technologies Protocols and Standards The OSI Model IP Addressing CD 3: Ports Services WAN Internet Access Remote Access Security Protocols CD 4: Server Operating Systems Client Connectivity Tools for Networking Firewalls Proxy Service Network Connectivity Virtual Local Area Networks Antivirus Software Fault Tolerance Disaster Recovery CD 5: Troubleshooting Network Utilities Troubleshooting Network Services Troubleshooting Topologies Troubleshooting Strategy Preparation for a Certification Test 14 Specialized Solutions. .

Specialized Solutions. 15 . It is designed to be an effective study tool that will help you retain the information that is presented in the course.Introduction This study guide is divided into 11 chapters. Inc.

.

and applications (resources). as a networking professional. But for our purposes. a central file server can keep unauthorized users from accessing confidential or sensitive files. It is much less expensive to purchase one network printer to serve everyone’s needs (or one department’s depending on the size of the network) than to purchase a printer for every user. It is very important that. you understand exactly what a network is. users can access programs. This section focuses on what a network is and why they are used so extensively in today’s computer environment.) Most companies network their office computers for the simple reason of economics.” Real estate professionals would think of networking as a means to make more sales through talking to people about what they do. Inc. Another advantage of networking is the ability to have a centralized location for document storage. and peripherals without using what is fondly known as the “sneaker net.” (Taking a floppy disk with the information that you want to share or print to the computer that can provide the desired service. a network is a system of connecting independent computers so that users may share data. Specialized Solutions. 17 . Introduction to Networking There are many different uses for the term “networking. files. peripherals. Additionally. You will also be able to identify the two major network configurations and describe the difference between a LAN and a WAN. Sharing applications ensures that all users are using the same programs (and versions) and makes it much easier to manage documents. Through networking. An affiliation of broadcasting companies is also called a network (you’ve heard of NBC?). Saving files to one location (usually the file server) makes it easy for everyone to gain access to the files that they need. After completing this chapter you will understand why networking is important and how it relates to the computer environment. Benefits of Networking Computers The main reason that we network computers is to be able to share resources. A central file server also allows for an easier backup strategy to be implemented.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals This chapter introduces you to the basics of networking.

The main distinction between a LAN and a WAN is that a LAN is confined to a limited area whereas a WAN has no geographical limits. A WAN can connect networks from building to building or across the world. A LAN is the basic (and smallest) starting point of any computer network. The Internet is the world’s largest WAN.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Local Area Networks (LAN) and Wide Area Networks (WAN) There are two basic structures of network types: • • LAN (Local Area Networks) WAN (Wide Area Networks) LAN WAN A network is classified into one of these groups based upon its size and function. the speed of communication between the computers is typically much faster in a LAN. Also. it is still considered a LAN. or if its hundreds of computers spread throughout a high-rise office building. When LANs are connected they create a WAN. Even if the network is merely two computers connected by a cable to share information. 18 Specialized Solutions. . Inc.

it would appear that the advantages outweigh the disadvantages. configuration and management may be more challenging.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals There is actually a third classification of networks: a MAN (Metropolitan Area Network). A workstation is a computer workspace that is connected to a network. The mainframe is always the server and anyone who accesses it is always the client. Since the client/server network is the most common choice of businesses today. there may be a dedicated server for file storage (called a file server). A MAN is larger than a LAN but is limited to a metropolitan area such as a city or county. The advantages of this type of network are central administration. it is the role they play in the dynamic world of desktops and laptops that changes. including applications. and expandability. The Internet has replaced most MANs today. if that same workstation happened to be connected to a printer that another user wanted to access. A large network may have more than one server. These terms are not interchangeable. The only true client/server relationship where the roles do not change is the mainframe computer. or a mail server (E-mail). Also. that is capable of servicing clients who access shared files. network security. since it would be serving the needs of a user (or client). Servers and clients are roles played by computers and users as they interact in their daily activity. Specialized Solutions. However. including hard disk space and RAM. also known as clients. efficiency in backing up the data. that access would cause the workstation to become a server. It is important to know what a MAN is. when the user is getting information from the server. The disadvantages are greater expense and the complexity of installation. and is a client. log onto the server to access the files or applications that they wish to use. A network can be either a peer-topeer network or a server-based network. For example. The Client/Server Relationship A network is classified by how it shares information. one for printing (print server). A mainframe will handle all the functions. but they are not common. Users. 19 . one for applications (application server). A server is a high-end computer that has a very large amount of storage. Client/Server Networking In a server-based network there is a dedicated computer called a server that is the central location of resources. Inc.

The computers are simply cabled together. network security is unreliable. All of the computers on the network can act as either clients or servers depending upon the needs of the user. and as long as each computer has an operating system capable of client/sharing (e. In a peer-to-peer network all computers are equal. Windows 95 and up) they will be able to communicate via the network. Also. a peer-to-peer network is difficult to expand.g. This type of network is most often used when fewer than ten computers are involved. A peer-to-peer network is simple and inexpensive to install. A disadvantage of the peer-to-peer network is that since users are responsible for their own systems’ security. Peer-to-Peer Network 20 Specialized Solutions. . Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Client/Server Network Peer-to-Peer Networking In a peer-to-peer network there are no separate computers that act as servers.

they do not move the transmissions along. and even how the cabling is run through a building. If not prevented. The nodes (computers or devices connected to the network) are all connected along a single cable. However. only the device whose address matches the address encoded in the signal will respond to the signal. and how a network will be managed are all potential problems that need to be considered when planning a network. In a Bus network. This cable is called a trunk. design. Only one computer at a time can transmit data on a Bus network or signals will collide and the transmission will fail. backbone. The signal is sent out on the cable and it travels from one end of the cable to the other. (Network Interface Cards. or topology. you will need to know how to choose the network topology that will best suit the needs of your network. An electronic signal is sent out on the cable to all of the devices connected on the network. As a network professional. Devices only listen for data being transmitted. There are three standard topologies that a network professional needs to understand: • • • Bus Topology Star Topology Ring Topology Bus Topology The simplest and probably the most used form of network topologies is the Bus topology (sometimes called a linear bus). NICs. or segment. connectors. map. the network will go down and devices will not be able to communicate with each other. 21 . if the cable breaks.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals Basic Network Structure (Topology) A network’s basic structure. The type and capabilities of the equipment that will be used. Setting up a network requires more than just cabling the computers together. the signal would travel back and forth along the cable and cause what is known as signal bounce. Inc. Different topologies have different cabling requirements. Specialized Solutions. are all determined by the topology used. future growth needs. refers to its physical layout. a component called a terminator is installed at each end of the cable. While the signal is bouncing back and forth. Devices on a Bus topology communicate by sending data to a specific address on the network (a device’s address). how the computers will talk to each other (protocols). it prevents other devices from sending data. The Bus topology is a passive topology. or diagram. To stop signal bounce. This means that the more computers that are connected to a Bus the slower the network becomes as devices are waiting to transmit or retransmit. scheme. also called Network Adapter Cards). A terminator absorbs the signal and stops signal bounce.

but the advantage is that if one computer (or the cable that connects one computer to the hub) goes down. A disadvantage is that if one computer fails. it can affect the entire network. all devices are connected to a central point called a hub. the entire network will go down. The data is transmitted around the loop in one direction and passes through each computer on the network. The signal is actually boosted and sent on along the cable when it passes through the computers on the network. Inc. If the hub fails. Star Topology Ring Topology In a Ring topology. The Ring is not a passive topology like the Bus topology.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Star Topology In a Star topology. the rest of the network will still continue to function. the devices are connected in one continuous circle of cable. It requires a lot more cable than the Bus topology. however. 22 Specialized Solutions. There are no ends to terminate. .

These are the methods in which a network is actually wired. on the other hand. This is very expensive to install but it is extremely reliable because of the redundant paths. they operate between the hubs like a bus topology and are therefore a logical bus.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals With IBM Token Ring networks. Hybrid Topologies The Star Bus topology is a hybrid of the Star and Bus topologies. the ring is actually in a special type of hub called a Multistation Access Unit (MSAU). 23 . The Star Ring topology is similar to the Star Bus. You will be able to see a physical topology. Inc. It consists of several Star topology networks that are linked using linear Bus trunks. These are known as Hybrid topologies. Before you can understand some of these special topologies. However. For example. you will need to know the difference between a physical and a logical topology. Token Ring networks are physical stars and logical rings. Mesh Topology In the Mesh topology every device is connected to every other device by separate cables and has redundant paths. In these networks. we have been discussing physical topologies. Specialized Solutions. This gives us a physical star topology. but the hubs in a Star Ring are connected in a star pattern by a main hub. So far. today’s networking professional will encounter many network topologies that are combinations of the above configurations. Also. some Ethernet networks today are wired using a using multiple hubs. is how the network actually works. A logical topology. a computer can fail and not prevent the network from functioning. Special Topologies In addition to the above topologies.

. .Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Wireless Topology A Wireless topology is one in which there aren’t any cables connecting the network devices to the LAN or one which the LAN uses wireless technology between access points. Since each computer has its own connection to the wireless access point (WAP). Inc. The benefits of wireless technology will be discussed at length in Chapter 4 of this book. 24 Specialized Solutions. the topology of a wireless network is that of an “invisible star”.

25 . Inc.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals Specialized Solutions.

only one device at a time can communicate on the network. We will also cover access methods in more detail in the chapter “Network Protocols and Standards. The two most common network standards are distinguished by their respective media access methods. The method that is used for an individual device to be able to use the network party line is called media access. Multiple Access means that more than one computer 26 Specialized Solutions. It is passed along from device to device until it arrives at the computer whose addressing information matches the one encoded on the token. The sending machine then creates a new token to send around the ring that will be grabbed by the next device that wants to transmit data on the network.” Token Passing Token passing is the method of sending data around a Token Ring topology. The sending computer grabs the token and encodes it with addressing information for the receiving computer and sends it out on the ring. Since there is only one token. With several devices connected to one media. we create kind of a “party line”. Carrier Sense means the network card listens to the cable for a quiet period during which it can send messages. The receiving computer then sends the token back to the sending computer to let it know that it received the message. Token Passing Ethernet Ethernet uses a system known as Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD). . A token is passed along from device to device until it is received by a computer that needs to transmit. they are called Token Ring and Ethernet. Another aspect of networks that is related to topology is the way in which the network is accessed by individual devices. This is based on the media or wiring of the network. and the message is delivered. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Access The topologies that we have been discussing describe the way in which the computers and other devices on a network are connected.

Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals can be connected to the same cable. Ethernet transmits at 10 Mbps and Fast Ethernet transmits at 100 Mbps. Specialized Solutions. Inc. Fast Ethernet works on the same principals as Ethernet but operates at 10 times the speed of the original. Collision Detection Fast Ethernet Fast Ethernet was developed to meet the increasing demands on networks. 27 . Collision Detection is the ability to detect whether messages have collided in transit (neither message will arrive at their destination and both will be retransmitted).

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Hubs and Concentrators More and more networks are using hubs and they are pretty much standard equipment in today’s networks. Inc. since they provide a common location for connecting the cabling of a network. Hubs can be classified as either passive or active. they are all the same. Passive Hub – Patch Panel 28 Specialized Solutions. hubs come in a variety of names depending on their function. . The most common name used with Ethernet is a hub or a concentrator. Today. Just remember. they are called MSAUs (Multiple Station Access Units). With a Token Ring. Passive hubs do not require any electrical power to function. Passive Hubs A passive hub acts as a connection point only. Essentially. Signals pass through the hub but are not regenerated or amplified. not all hubs are the same and you must use one that is designed to meet the needs of the network.

Active Hub Hub-Based Networks Hub-based networks are increasing in popularity. Inc.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals Active Hubs Most of the hubs used today are active hubs. 4) Expanding the network can be easily accomplished by using hubs. 3) A variety of cable types can be accommodated. This type type of hub requires electrical power to function. An active hub regenerates or amplifies a signal when it is passed through. They have many advantages over other types of networks: 1) If a cable breaks only the portion of the network on that segment is affected. 2) Centralized monitoring of traffic and activity along with diagnostic capabilities are available. Specialized Solutions. 29 .

go back and review the chapter again. Topology is a term we use to describe the logical shape of the connection of computers in a network. and ring. A LAN is the smallest form and is the basic building block for larger networks. Inc. A WAN is not geographically limited and typically has greater speed of communication than a WAN. star. We also learned about the two basic network classifications of networks: the peer-to-peer network and the server-based network. The two types of networks are LANs and WANs. Be sure to complete the following exercises and review questions. and the Internet is the world’s largest WAN. . If you are having trouble with any of these concepts.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Summary In this chapter we learned that the main reason for networking (as it relates to computers) is the sharing of resources. 30 Specialized Solutions. The three main types of topology are bus. It is important to know the differences between these two classifications and the advantages and disadvantages of each.

Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. Inc.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. 31 . Keyword Active Hub Application Application Server Bus Topology Client Data Fax Server File Server Hub Hybrid Topology LAN Mail Server MAN Media Mesh Topology Network Network Administrator Passive Hub Peer-to-peer Peripheral Print Server Definition Specialized Solutions.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Keyword Resources Ring Topology Security Server Server-based Sharing Star Topology Token Passing User WAN Wireless Topology Definition 32 Specialized Solutions. Inc. .

10. Name the three basic topologies.Chapter 1 1. 5. Name some advantages of a Peer-to-Peer network. Name some disadvantages of a Server-based network. 11.Chapter 1 – Networking Fundamentals Review Questions . 8. 33 . What is the difference between a physical and logical topology? 12. Name two media access methods. What does MAN stand for and why is it no longer in use? 6. Inc. Specialized Solutions. What are the key differences between a local area network (LAN) and a wide area network (WAN)? 2. What is a “sneaker net”? 4. 7. Name some disadvantages of a Peer-to-Peer network. Name some advantages of a Server-based network. 9. What is the main reason for networking computers? 3. Name some advantages of having centralized documents.

.

You can get it all set up and turn on the power. processor time. network operating systems were designed to operate on top of an existing operating system. The operating system is also responsible for the running of applications (e. Inc. Today. but without an operating system. what we are really talking about are network operating systems. we are referencing the built-in network operating system component. and peripherals are all controlled by the operating system (the software). In this chapter we will explore the features and benefits of the more popular network operating systems. A computer needed two sets of software in order to function in a networking environment. When we refer to the operating system in this chapter. What is an Operating System? Not that long ago. We will also discuss their minimum requirements and interoperability capabilities. This chapter is all about the various operating systems with which a networking professional needs to be familiar. if you don’t have the software to run it. word-processing. Specialized Solutions. Network operating systems (NOS) are specialized operating systems designed to integrate computers in a networking environment.Network Operating Systems (NOS) Up to this point we have focused on the design aspects of networking. The main objective is to make sure that the hardware and the applications are all compatible with each other. When we are talking about operating systems. and database programs). spreadsheet. most networked computers run software that was specifically designed to run both the computer’s stand-alone functions as well as its networking functions. it will just sit there. Even if you have the best network design composed of the best hardware in the universe. hard disk space.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) Chapter 2 . it is just a pile of metal and plastic.g. 35 . The differences between server and client operating systems as well as preemptive and non-preemptive multitasking will be covered as well. Hardware resources such as RAM. Most of today’s client and server operating systems have a built-in network operating system. as well as the operating system.

It is used on all of the latest operating systems. the processor is never taken away from a task.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Preemptive vs. A true multitasking (multi-processing) operating system is able to process as many tasks as it has processors. In non-preemptive multitasking. Non-preemptive Multitasking Multitasking. Preemptive multitasking means that the operating system can take control of the processor without a task’s permission. Most operating systems appear to be performing multiple tasks by alternating between tasks until they are all completed. Non-preemptive multitasking is when the task decides when it is done with the processor. Inc. . 36 Specialized Solutions. Preemptive multitasking began with Windows 95 and the Intel Pentium processor. means that an operating system has the ability to perform more than one task at a time. put simply.

Peer-to-Peer LANs Many smaller networking environments utilize the peer-to-peer network configuration. With NT the only drawback is that you will not be able to utilize NT’s advanced security features because Windows 95 is not compatible with the NTFS file system. It is necessary to install the requester software (NetWare Client32 for Windows 95) with NetWare. To install a NIC with Windows 95/98 is as simple as installing the card. They use an icon called the Network Neighborhood for desktop access of the network. each workstation may act as either a client or a server depending upon whether it is accessing resources on another workstation or if another workstation is accessing its resources. Then. Windows ME Windows ME is the client operating system that has followed the Windows 9x operating systems. A peer-to-peer LAN is not a client/server-based network. Their new graphical interface and networking capabilities make them a vast improvement over their predecessors. Usually this type of network only shares files and peripheral devices. 37 . Instead. and you have a working network. It is certainly the most economical of the networking choices. Inc. Usually only NICs and cabling will need to be purchased to implement this kind of network. Peer-to-peer LANs are an excellent choice for the network that has less than ten computers and no need of security (such as a small office environment). Novell NetWare. Windows 95/98 also performs very well as a client with both the NetWare and Windows NT operating systems. It is well-suited for editing home movies. All shared resources are arranged on a hierarchical basis and displayed in Network Neighborhood. such as BSD UNIX. Windows 95/98 is also able to better identify NICs. all you have to do is share any directories and peripherals to the network. turning on the computer and answering questions. Help and support is improved from Windows 98 and home networking is made easier than ever. and archiving music. Most of the operating systems in use today are already capable of managing this type of network. moving photos to the Web. to communicate with other computers over a network. or a similar program. Plug-n-Play technology has also made installing a NIC much easier.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) What is a Network Operating System (NOS)? A NOS is an operating system that includes other software. Specialized Solutions. It protects critical files and will allow you to revert your system back to normal if anything goes wrong. Windows 95/98 Windows 95 and Windows 98 are operating systems that include a network operating system. Microsoft Client.

a simplified visual design. multilingual support. peer-topeer support for Windows 9x and NT. Other Peer-to-Peer LANs The following table lists other peer-to-peer LAN software and their manufacturers that the networking professional may come across in real life but are unlikely to be on the test: 38 Specialized Solutions. IPsec and Kerberos support. It.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Windows 2000 Professional Windows 2000 Professional is the client counterpart to Windows 2000 server. like the rest of the client OS software mentioned here. Inc. like ME. Windows XP Home Windows XP Home edition is the newest edition of Microsoft’s OS for home users. EFS (Encrypting File System). It also supports Microsoft Management Console (MMC) and group policies. . remote OS installation. which allows for safety when installing additional software or making changes to the computer’s configuration. is equipped to be networked easily. driver certification. It features file protection. It allows for faster user switching. It also uses System Restore.

39 . This can also provide accessibility and security for all devices on a network. Some network operating systems require that different versions are installed depending on whether a computer is the server (provides resources remotely over a network) or a client (uses resources locally). the purpose of a network operating system is to connect all devices on a network (computers and peripherals) and to coordinate their usability. the computers act as both a client and a server. However.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) Software Name 10NetPlus AppleTalk Easy Net GV LAN OS LANsmark LANsoft LANStep LANtastic NET/30 Network OSCBIS OS/2 Warp Personal NetWare POWERLan ReadyLink WEB Manufacturer Digital Communications Associates. Inc. Inc. Specialized Solutions. Apple Computer LanMark Grapevine LAN Products D-Link Systems ACCTon Technology Hayes Microcomputer Products Artisoft Invisible Software Peachtree IBM Corporation Novell Performance Technology Compex WebCorp Server/Client Software In a peer-to-peer network. it is necessary to have an operating system that can perform in this environment. In a Serverbased network.

Server Software As their name implies. and to the server. Most network administrators provide some sort of fault-tolerance system on the server. most of the data is stored on the server. At the very least. Some networks even cluster server so that more that one server can share a database of information. the server should be attached to an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). server software includes services for the following: • • • Managing User Accounts Security Data Protection Managing User Accounts Servers make it possible to manage users from a central location. They are the storage facility for the bulk of the data in a network environment and as such are an excellent point from which to centrally manage a network. They process requests from clients for resources such as files and peripherals. Unlike most client software. This makes it an excellent point from which to perform regular backups. The server keeps track of who is logged onto a network and what resources have been (or are being) accessed. Servers exist to serve.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide There are two types of networking software that must be considered: • • Client Software Server Software Client Software If you type a command for your stand-alone computer to perform a task. . Administrators set up and manage user accounts and passwords. Data Protection As we already discussed. Security Administrators can set up the accounts to determine who gets privileges to what resources and change them as needed (including denying access). Users are required to enter a password before they can log on and gain access. The component that handles these requests is called the redirector. However. the command is processed over the computer’s internal CPU via the computer’s local bus. Inc. Network security is discussed in greater detail in Chapter 10. the operating system has to have the capability to redirect (forward) the request away from the local bus. if you were requesting resources or services that exist on a remote server. out onto the network. This 40 Specialized Solutions.

If it is a network designator the request is forwarded to the server. Inc. etc. or if they need to be redirected to the server. The purpose of the redirector is to make network resources look like local resources to application programs. The Redirector (Requester) The redirector (in Novell NetWare this is called the requester) is responsible for forwarding requests away from the local bus and redirecting them to the server. It does not need to know anything about networks. 41 . Basically. If it is a local designator (drive C: for example) the request is passed on to the local bus. Specialized Solutions. it is a section of code located in the network operating system that intercepts requests and determines if they are local requests. This makes the application program believe that it is simply working with a very large hard drive or with a local printer.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) provides for load balancing of the server resources as well as fault tolerance if one server were to fail. called drive designators. It does this by assigning drive letters. which opens the file or transfers the print job to the network printer. to resources.

web-publishing.12 and 4. but there will always be data in any network to which access must be restricted. Novell NetWare The NetWare operating system has been around for a long time. non-shareable. Version 6. Versions 3. messaging. time. The earliest version (2. shared. which is a Windows-based utility. Version 4. or Pentium machines. servers. copied. It is Novell’s push to gain market share and is a way of creating an Intranet. and volumes is also handled with NDS. . which is like the Internet but within a network or company. See Chapter 10 for more information on network security. It is a reliable operating system that provides performance and security. Inc. First. 486. NetWare File Services The NetWare file server hard drive may be mapped to a client and the client machine will recognize the drive as a logical drive and be able to access it as it would any other drive in the computer. and account restrictions. NetWare Security The purpose of a network may be to share resources. management. but it is losing market share to Microsoft servers every year. login security provides authentication and verification of user name. groups. as well as what kind of access they have. deleted. which is a DOS-based utility. With NDS’ single point logon. In this section. routing.11 is called IntranetWare. NetWare provides more than adequate network security by using a combination of approaches. it was the most popular server operating system. NetWare is administered through NetADMIN.EXE. or through NWADMIN. Each of them has its own advantages and disadvantages. name service. or changed. NetWare Directory Services (NDS) NDS (NetWare Directory Services) is the core of the NetWare operating system. • NetWare’s popularity is due largely to its ability to provide services across multioperating system environments. password. It is a hierarchically organized database that provides security. It may be installed in either the client or server format. Organization of network resources such as users. and file and print services.5 is now on the market. Directory and file attributes are used to set the types of access for a file or directory such as viewed. we will take a closer look a some of the more popular ones.11 operate on 386. In the past.2) was designed to operate on 286 machines.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide NOS Packages There are a multitude of network operating systems available for use. 42 Specialized Solutions. a user may logon from anywhere on the network and gain access with all of their assigned rights and privileges intact. Trustee rights regulate which directories and files a user can access. NetWare is based upon the industry standard X500 directory architecture.

as well as others. NetWare also provides a method of using simple commands to send messages to other users on the network. Inc. Printers may be attached to the server. NetWare Minimum Requirements The following are the minimum installation requirements as specified by Novell for installing their server software: Specialized Solutions. and finally to the printer. 43 . next to the print server. You can even send messages to everyone in a group. NetWare Message Handling Service (MHS) MHS may be installed on any server and configured to be a network wide E-mail system. The file server and the print server can be the same computer. except an individual workstation. a workstation.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) NetWare Print Services NetWare Print Services can support up to 256 printers. You can send messages to individuals or to groups very easily. Print requests are first routed to the file server. or directly to the network. It is compatible with E-mail programs such as Novell’s GroupWise and Microsoft Mail.

1 or later (Standard or Extended Edition) and the NetWare Client32 for OS/2 OS/2 2.0 or later and the NetWare Client32 for Macintosh OS Specialized Solutions.X: CPU RAM Free Hard Drive Space Version 5: CPU RAM Free Hard Drive Space Pentium Class or higher 64 MB 550 MB 386 or higher 16 MB 105 MB 386 or higher 6 MB 30 MB 286 or higher 2.11 or OS/2 Warp and the NetWare Client32 for OS/2 Macintosh 6.X: CPU RAM Free Hard Drive Space Version 3. .5 MB 20 MB Client Software The client software may be installed on any computer running any of the following: • • • • • 44 DOS 3.X: CPU RAM Free Hard Drive Space Version 4.0 or later and the NetWare Client32 for DOS OS/2 1.1 or later and the NetWare Client32 for DOS MS Windows 3.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Version 2. Inc.

Full Control. Inc. You must have administrative privileges in order to share anything on a Windows network. Microsoft released the Windows NT operating system and a network operating system version. its popularity is being replaced by Microsoft Windows Servers.File Allocation Table) during installation. Problems do occur when trying to operate within the Windows NT domain. allowing restricted access to individuals or groups. Windows NT Advanced Server in 1993. Windows combines the operating system and the network operating system into one. interoperability simply means the ability of an operating system to operate with other systems. Change. the Windows servers may be configured to store each workstation’s directories in order to provide centralized data management and backups. Windows NT has two versions: Server (the server software) and Workstation (the client software). The NetWare client can be installed with almost any other operating system. With this method. The advanced security features of Windows are not available if you choose the DOS file system (FAT . Specialized Solutions. The NT file system (NTFS) must be utilized in order to take full advantage of Windows security features. The newest of these server operating systems. Today. Files in Windows may be shared by using a simple file sharing method similar to sharing files on a peer-to-peer network. and is limited to the publicly shared files mentioned earlier. As we’ve already discussed.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) NetWare Interoperability As the word implies. It is possible to use both the NTFS and FAT file systems as long as they are in different partitions on the hard drive. The attributes such as Read. but it does have several advantages. A disadvantage of this is that anyone not using NTFS cannot recognize NTFS directories. NetWare is extremely efficient at operating with other systems. Windows File Services Like NetWare. Microsoft Windows NT Network Operating System While NetWare was the network operating system of the 80s and early 90s. offer even more advantages and stronger security than their predecessors. This type is performed by each workstation or server publicly sharing a directory on the network. or No Access may be set on the directory. you may assign directory and filelevel permissions to the data. which as at the base of all Microsoft’s servers. 45 . This makes it more difficult to work in multi-operating system environments. Unlike NetWare. The services provided by the server are more powerful and it is easier for programmers to develop software that takes advantage of Microsoft’s server/workstation technology. but Windows NT contains services such as NWLink and Gateway Service for NetWare (GSNW) that allow them to work together effectively. another security method must be utilized. In order to take maximum advantage of the security features in Windows . The NT Kernel. Although Server and Workstation can both operate as either stand-alone or network systems. Server is much more powerful so that it may provide network management. actually evolved from a project that was jointly developed by IBM and Microsoft (OS/2). Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003.

more than one printer can be installed to any machine. . especially with the latest Windows Server 2003 family. See Chapter 10 for more information on network security. A printer need only be shared to the network to be accessible to anyone on the network. Windows Print Servers Any workstation or server may perform as a print server in a Windows network. you are given the option to share it to the network.. 46 Specialized Solutions.. Rights must be assigned to users in order for them to use any resources or perform any tasks in the domain. Microsoft wanted to make NT as compatible with NetWare as possible. A domain controller is a server that maintains and manages all accounts. The following is a list of services included with Windows Server software to ensure NetWare compatibility: NWLink is actually a clone of Novell’s IPX/SPX protocol and is used for communication between Microsoft and NetWare. This trend continued with the latest Windows server operating systems (Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003. Alerter Service sends the notifications that are monitored by the messenger service. except that you are asked if it is to be a network or local printer.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Windows Server Security Security was a major concern in the development of Windows Servers. Microsoft uses domains to control access and authenticate users and computers. and user rights.) Installing a network printer is just like installing a local printer. Browser Service provides a list of all available domain and workgroup servers. permissions. Even if you are installing a local printer. Windows Network Services There are many services available in Windows to manage network flow: Messenger Service monitors the network and provides pop-up messages for the user. Workstation Service is the redirector service. A domain is simply a group of users. Interoperability As Novell NetWare was the “big kid on the block” when NT came on the scene. Printing is as easy as selecting the printer that you want to use (assuming that you have the appropriate permissions). Inc. and resources with a shared security database. (Of course a user still has to be assigned the permission to access a resource. Server Service provides access to network resources. computers. At least one domain controller is assigned to each domain. Remember.

and is. Previous Microsoft server operating systems were built to serve and then had security features to protect them. It also offers an improved version of NTFS and fault tolerant versions of RAID on dynamic drives. It allows for a single logon to access resources anywhere on the network.. Migration Tool for NetWare is a tool used to convert from NetWare to Windows. it has more “locked down” security templates that make it less likely that users will try to go around the security. This software is not included with Netware but can be purchased separately. UNIX Operating Systems UNIX stands for UNiplexed Information and Computing System. Installing CSNW automatically installs the NWLink protocol as well. Its purpose is to move (called migrating) NetWare account information to Microsoft’s domain controller. which govern what users can see and do on the network. Group policies can be utilized with server 2000. 47 . Even though UNIX was not designed as a network operating system it can be.well serve. It can be installed on the Microsoft client to allow it to connect the Netware server directly. It provides all of the advantages of Windows 2000 Server. Active Directory is a directory service that stores information about objects on a network and makes this information available to both users and administrators. In addition. Windows 2000 Server Windows 2000 server is the server-side OS to Windows 2000 Professional. DSMN (Directory Service Manager for NetWare) is another add-on utility that is used to integrate user and group account information between the two operating systems. It allows Novell NDS computers to be managed just as Microsoft domain controllers. UNIX is a Specialized Solutions. This is necessary because all Microsoft client workstations in a domain must connect to a NetWare server through a single contact point.0) than the previous version in Windows 2000 (IIS 5. Windows Server 2003 offers a more secure Web Server (IIS 6.. In fact. Windows Server 2003 is the first Windows server that was built primarily with security in mind. Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 is the latest in the line of Microsoft server operating systems. CSNW (Client Services for NetWare) is the Microsoft service that allows workstations to use file and print services on a NetWare server. Installing GSNW automatically installs the NWLink protocol as well. In contrast. when using Windows Server 2003 you typically must remove or configure security boundaries in order to get the server to. used as such. Network performance will decrease as the number of computers accessing the gateway increases. Probably the biggest feature in Windows 2000 server is the addition of Active Directory. FPNW (File and Print Service for NetWare) is a utility that enables NetWare clients to access Microsoft file and print services.0).Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) GSNW (Gateway Services for NetWare) provides the gateway between an Microsoft domain and the NetWare server. Inc. but it adds many features that are designed exclusively for security.

or Macintosh System 7 for its operating system. UNIX is a multi-tasking. to convert the UNIX host into a file server. Linux is another operating system similar to UNIX. Inc. which means that it can be changed by a software programmer. TCP/IP. . The multi-tasking UNIX host will run this software as just another application. A file redirector is used to allow the workstation to store and retrieve UNIX files as if they were in the original format. Linux is open source. It is available on both Intel (PC) and PowerPC (Mac) platforms. general-purpose operating system. however. and many other features associated with an OS. as well as others. At its inception. The UNIX-based workstation can run DOS. Banyan VINES (Virtual Integrated Network Service) Like Windows. security. many variations of Linux have been created over the years such as Caldera and Red Hat. At one time. as well as file and printer sharing. Like Novell NetWare. It is a publicly open system that has made it popular among enthusiasts already familiar with a UNIX interface. It uses a GUI (graphical user interface). and messaging services. but has lost market share since the arrival of NetWare. VINES was originally based on UNIX and has a directory services application called StreetTalk layered on top. in fact the software is available for a free download. but rely solely on the UNIX host for resources. VINES is a great performer in multi-operating system environments. UNIX. A UNIX system consists of a host (a central computer) with terminals for the users. Linux was designed to be less expensive than UNIX. StreetTalk provides directory. Because of its open source nature. OS/2. It is primarily used on minicomputers and has many features that are favored in the engineering and scientific environments. 48 Specialized Solutions. Banyan VINES is a client/server-based network operating system. multi-user. it was an extremely popular network operating system. These terminals are not stand-alone computers. Software is available.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide bulky operating system.

Specialized Solutions. In conjunction with Xerox. Macs are known for being used primarily in video or graphic production.Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) The Macintosh ("Mac") was developed by Apple Computer in 1984. Inc. they developed what later became known as the mouse and the first GUI display. and the processor used in Apples today is called PowerPC. 49 . but users also use them personally. both at home and on the go. The Mac OS X is the most current operating system used in conjunction with the Apple computer (at the time of the writing of this book).

In a server-based network. Server and client machines typically use different operating systems. the most popular network operating systems also function as the network operating system. In a peer-to-peer network. Today. Network operating systems allow a computer to function in a network environment. Windows NT has Server software for the server and Workstation software for client machines. It is important for the networking professional to know the major network operating systems used today. Study through the chapter again if you need to. and data backups. and at least be familiar with others. an application is unaware that it is working from a network. The redirector then routes the request to the proper bus accordingly. 50 Specialized Solutions. Without an operating system a computer is just another pile of metal and plastic. centralization of administration. The main advantages of the server-based network are increased security. . etc. such as Novell NetWare and Windows server operating systems. Be sure to complete the following exercises and review questions. the computers may function as either a server (when sharing resources to others on the network) or a client (when sharing the resources of another computer on the network). There still are numerous LANs that use a network operating system over a conventional operating system. (UNIX. Inc. A key component in a network operating system is the Redirector (called the Requester in Novell NetWare). Banyan VINES. Novell’s NetWare allows for client machines to use a variety of operating systems.).Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Summary Operating systems are the lifeblood of the computer. The function of the redirector is to determine whether a requested resource is located locally (on the client computer) or exists on the server (remotely). the client computers rely on the server for their resources. With the redirector.

Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS)

KEYWORDS Exercise
Keyword Client Software CSNW DSMN FAT File Server GSNW Interoperability MHS Linux Macintosh Multitasking NDS Non-Preemptive Multitasking NOS NTFS NWLink Preemptive Multitasking Print Server Redirector/Requester Security Server Software UNIX Definition

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

51

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide

Review Questions
1. What is the difference between an operating system and a network operating system?

2.

What is the difference between preemptive and non-preemptive multitasking?

3.

What is the purpose of the redirector?

4.

NetWare is designed as an operating system that will overlay _____________ environments.

5.

What is NDS?

6.

What are the minimum hardware requirements for installing Novell NetWare version 5?

7.

Define interoperability.

8.

Unlike NetWare, Windows NT combines the _____________ and the ___________________ into one.

9.

What is NTFS?

10.

What is a domain?

11.

What are the minimum hardware requirements for Windows NT Server?

52

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 2 – Network Operating Systems (NOS) 12. Name some of the services and protocols that Microsoft included with Windows NT to ensure interoperability with NetWare.

13.

What OS is similar to UNIX and is a publicly open system?

14.

What type of computer was developed by Apple computer in 1984?

15.

What type of network would utilize Windows for Workgroups as an operating system?

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

53

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide

54

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards

Chapter 3- The OSI Model and Communication Standards
In this chapter you will learn about the OSI (Open System Interconnection) model, what it is and its primary function. You will learn about which layer of the OSI model handles each function, and which devices function at each layer. We will also discuss the IEEE 802 standards as well as touch on various protocols and how they relate to the OSI Model. The OSI model and IEEE 802 Standards are a big part of the Network+ exam.

The Seven Layers of Network Communication
The Open Systems Interface (OSI) model is the most commonly referenced standard in the networking industry today. The International Standards Organization (ISO) released a set of specifications for connecting devices on a network in 1978. These specifications were updated in 1984 to what we know today as the OSI model. The purpose of these specifications is to describe how network hardware and software communicate with one another. These specifications allow hardware and software manufacturers to develop products that are compatible with each other. The OSI model is designed as a framework that allows communication between similar and dissimilar computer systems across a network. The OSI Model was created after many of the protocols it represents were already in use. As a result, some of the information regarding these protocols may appear to be inconsistent with the OSI Model. There are seven steps required to prepare data for transmission between the sending application and the receiving application. The OSI model represents these seven steps as seven layers. These layers are used extensively in network environments and it is imperative that the networking professional understand the different layers and their functions. The OSI model defines the rules involving how network devices will contact each other, and how they will communicate if they are using different languages. The OSI model also defines how a device knows when to transmit; when not to transmit; and how to make sure that transmissions are received correctly by the recipient. Even how the physical media is arranged and connected; how the data will flow (at what speed); and how bits are represented on the medium are defined within these specifications.

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

55

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide

The Seven Layers of OSI The first thing you should notice is we’ve listed the layers from the top down. This model is usually represented in this way because we refer to the layers as upper and lower layers, depending upon their functions.

Seven Layers of the OSI Model
The following is a summary of the seven layers of the OSI model starting with the top layer: Application Layer This layer of the OSI Model defines how network services or applications interact with the network. These services include file, print, and messaging services. Error recovery may also be a function of the Application layer. The Application layer is responsible for communication between a user’s application and the network. This is not the actual application or program, simply a support layer that allows an application to use the network by acting as a translator. This is the layer that allows users to send E-mail, transfer files across the network, or access a

56

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

without duplication. bit ordering. It provides a logical connection between the two devices. Inc. As its name implies. For example. The Transport layer accepts packets from the Session layer and repackages them. The Transport layer is also responsible for packaging. The Session layer uses a name lookup service such as NetBIOS to identify and establish sessions between two computers. and error free. Each connection is called a session. It translates data into a format that is compatible with the network. and data encryption. Only the data after the last transmission will have to be retransmitted after a failure. and when. The presentation layer acts as a translator between an application’s native format and the network. managing. and then the Presentation layer of the receiving computer translates the data back into a format that is compatible with the computer. This layer is responsible for establishing. interpreting graphics commands. The Session layer controls the communication between the two computers and determines who can transmit. It is responsible for resizing them before being sent to the destination computer. (so that an IBM compatible computer may communicate with a Macintosh. This layer is also responsible for data compression. half-duplex. It is also responsible for security and other functions that allow two applications to communicate over the network. The redirector is responsible for making network services appear to be local services to a computer. This layer enables computer applications to communicate with applications on remote machines as if they were local. it presents data to the application layer. and un-packaging the data for transport. and ending connections. The network redirector operates at this layer. etc. These checkpoints ensure that all data is sent (or received) and make it possible to limit retransmissions in the event of a network failure during transmission.) character set conversion. 57 . The Session layer organizes data synchronization and also inserts checkpoints in the data. they will be combined. protocol conversion. it will break the data into packets. or full-duplex communication. Presentation Layer The Presentation layer is the translator for the network. Sessions may be established using simplex. If Specialized Solutions. or receive. if the packets are too small. Session Layer The Session layer organizes the flow of data between devices. add any addressing information and error correction information. The Transport layer is responsible for delivering data that is in sequence. In short. Transport Layer The Transport layer is responsible for the errorfree delivery of the transmitted data.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards network database. and prepare it for its journey.

518 bytes and the smallest is 64 bytes. For example. Network Layer The hardware that is used to construct the network plays an important role at this layer. it will retransmit after a specified amount of time. The Network layer is responsible for communication between computers via their IP addresses. Once the data is reassembled. This layer also reassembles the data before passing it up to the Transport layer on the receiving side. IP and IPX are Network layer protocols. checked for errors. Inc.) It also includes control information such as frame type. It receives a packet from the Network layer and packages it into what is called a frame. it will be un-packed. . segmentation information and routing information. the Transport layer is responsible for the guaranteed delivery of packets. and then assembled and sent up to the Session layer. When you are using a connection-oriented protocol. It translates logical network addresses into physical machine addresses and determines the best route to the destination computer. especially on large intranetworks where there may be more than one way to reach a destination. however. This layer makes routing decisions for transmissions that are further away than a single link. This is accomplished through various error control and other protocol-dependent features. The sending computer does not send any more data until it receives the acknowledgement for the previous transmission. In an ideal world. they will be broken into smaller packets. Its header includes the hardware address of the sending and destination NIC cards. TCP is a connection-oriented protocol. Data Link Layer The Data Link layer is the second lowest layer in the OSI model. When you are using a connectionless protocol. all data packets will be sent and retrieved in an orderly. the destination computer will send an acknowledgement that the data was received. if they are larger than the largest acceptable frame size on a network. error free manner. UDP is a connectionless protocol. This layer is also responsible for breaking packets into smaller chunks. Should an error occur. (These addresses are hardwired onto the NIC by the manufacturers. The network layer handles all the routing information as packets travel from one network to another. the largest frame size on an Ethernet is 1. stripped of its addressing information. TCP and UDP are Transport layer protocols. This controls network congestion. Routers and NICs function on this layer. delivery of packets is not guaranteed. The Transport layer of the destination computer reassembles the data (returns it to its original state) and checks for errors and duplications.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide they are too large. If the sending computer does not receive an acknowledgement. but connection-oriented protocols are more reliable. When the data is received. the Transport layer will sort out the problems and request that missing packets be retransmitted. 58 Specialized Solutions. Connectionless protocols are faster.

such as SDLC. The CRC is simply a calculation that assigns a value to the frame. Token Passing. They accomplished this by splitting the Data Link layer into two sub-layers. When the sending computer does not receive and acknowledgement. If it is not. If the Data Link layer in the destination computer comes up with the same value when it receives the frame. the Data Link layer is responsible for error-free transmissions. and Demand Priority. Although quite rare.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards In addition. The Logical Link Control layer is concerned with managing traffic over the physical medium.2 standard defines how this takes place. Logical Link Control (LLC) The Logical Link Control (LLC) sub-layer of the Data Link layer is the upper of the two sub-layers. It is responsible for connecting two computers on a network and maintaining that link. NetBIOS or NetWare and may also assign sequence numbers to frames and track acknowledgements. it is not unheard of for these addresses to be duplicated even with these precautions having been taken. If the calculation does not check out. it assumes the data was not damaged in transmission and sends an acknowledgement to the sending computer. then it discards the data. If it is. The way that a network shares the channel is called its carrier access method. 59 . It identifies a line protocol. Media Access Control (MAC) The Media Access Control (MAC) sub-layer of the Data Link layer controls the way that multiple computers share the same media channel. the destination computer will not send an acknowledgement. This sub-layer communicates directly with NICs using the MAC address. it accepts the data and passes it up to the next layer. In a broadcast network such as Ethernet. MAC addresses are copied to RAM when a NIC is initialized. The frame is accepted by the Physical layer of all of the computers on the network and passed up to the Data Link layer. The first 3 bytes (6-digits) identify the manufacturer. (they are the vendor code that is assigned to a manufacturer by the IEEE Committee) and the last 6-digits identify the NIC (host). TCP/IP is somewhat “self healing”. The following is an example of a MAC address: Specialized Solutions. The IEEE 802. It uniquely identifies devices on the same medium. The LLC sub-layer provides SAPs (Service Access Points) that are used by other computers to transfer information to the upper OSI layers. It is the Data Link layer that determines whether the message is for an individual computer or not. The MAC address is another name for the 12-digit (6 byte or 48 bits) hexadecimal address that is hardwired on the NIC by the manufacturer. the data is sent out on the wire to all computers. It adds a trailer to the frame that includes the CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check). In this way. The three main types of access methods are Contention (CSMA/CD & CSMA/CA). Inc. The IEEE Committee thought that the Data Link layer needed to be further defined. The manufacturer is assigned blocks of numbers to assign to NIC cards. it will automatically resend the packet. The combination of these numbers assures that each NIC that is manufactured (by any vendor) will have a unique MAC address.

Repeaters. Point-to-point and multipoint connections are addressed at the Physical layer. data work at the Data Link layer of the OSI model. Bridges operate at the Data Link layer.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 00-00-13-35-FD-AB The first 3 bytes (00-00-13) identify the manufacturer of the card. Physical Layer The Physical layer is the bottom layer of the OSI model. and determines when and how data may be transmitted. For example.iso. . visit www. Note: For more information on the OSI Model. It identifies the NIC. It converts the data into the raw bits and signals (1’s and 0’s) that are actually transmitted over the network medium. synchronizes the data. Switches. an Ethernet network using UTP would have different specifications than an Ethernet network using Fiber Optic cable. which are intelligent hubs that use MAC addresses to send packets. The physical characteristics of a network will affect the specifications of the Physical layer.ch/. The Physical layer of the receiving computer converts the bits back into frames. Bridges are devices that connect network segments and filter data using MAC addresses. The Physical layer is not concerned with the contents of the packets. all operate at the Physical layer of the OSI model. it is only concerned with the physical elements of the network and the transmission and reception of signals. Point-topoint communication is the process of one device communicating with one other device . 60 Specialized Solutions. Multipoint communication is the process of one device communicating with multiple devices on a network. It specifies such things as how many pins a network connector will have. Point to point communication is often used between switches and routers on a network. The last 3 bytes (35FD-AB) are the Device ID that is unique to the associated Vendor ID. It is the only layer of the OSI model that communicates directly with its peer on another computer. hubs and transceivers. It is responsible for the mechanical and electrical functions of transmitting data over a network. and what each one will do. Inc.

Inc. 61 .Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards Specialized Solutions.

Each protocol receives services from the layer directly below it. in effect there is a logical or virtual connection made directly between the two associated layers. When the destination computer receives the data. the data is back in its original form so that it may be interpreted by you and the request is considered processed. The Presentation layer passes the modified packet down to the Session layer. TCP/IP is a common example of a protocol stack. You are communicating directly with the Application layer. (Remember. protocols can be layered so that specific protocols handle their appropriate subtasks at specific layers of the OSI model. the Application layer is not the actual application. Headers contain instructions for tasks that need to be performed at that level. This is called a protocol stack. When it arrives at the Application layer of the destination computer. These subtasks are stacked in such a way that together they complete a whole task. and provides services to the layer directly above it. The affect of this layering is that communication is seemingly only taking place between the associated layers of the two computers. This is accomplished by each layer (with the exception of the top and bottom layers) adding a header to the message (or removing it on the receiving end) before passing it down (or up) to the next layer. simply a support layer to allow applications to perform network functions. Communication Between Peer Layers Most network models utilize this layered architecture. each layer is also responsible for adding or removing headers so that the data is ready to be interpreted by the next layer.) The request is in the form of a packet. This process continues until the packet reaches the Physical layer. For example: You send a request for services to the server. The request is then passed to the Presentation layer where a header is added to the message. Even though the data is passed down through the sending computer’s layers. and up through the receiving computer’s layers.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Protocol Stacks When more than one protocol is necessary to accomplish a task. As the packet travels up through the layers. Inc. In addition to reading the headers and performing the instructions. it simply converts the packet into a bit stream and sends it out onto the network medium. or suite. over the network medium. the process of moving through the layers is reversed. . In this way even completely dissimilar systems running different operating systems will be able to communicate. 62 Specialized Solutions. In order for computers to communicate with each other they need to be using the same protocol stacks. The Physical layer does not add a header. which also adds a header and passes the packet down to the Transport layer. each layer reads and performs the tasks specified in its peer’s header before passing the packet up to the next layer. Each protocol will communicate with its peer or equivalent on the other computer.

63 . Because of this. they are sometimes referred to by different names at different layers.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards Note: Packets (also called service data units) are made up of data and headers acquired from upper layers. The term packet is appropriate to all of the layers. Inc. but the following table lists the other names that might be associated with them at the various layers: Physical Layer Data Link Layer Network Layer Transport Layer Session Layer Presentation Layer Application Layer Signals or Bits or Data Stream into Frames Frames into Packets Frames or Datagrams into Segments Segments into data Data Data Data into Data Files or Messages Specialized Solutions.

we can better understand how they communicate across the layers. it would not match. The various layers of the protocol are communicating as though they have virtual connections. then to the Physical layer on the receiving computer and back up to the Application layer. This means that if you were to attempt to map a protocol or a standard directly to the OSI model. Also. By relating various protocols to the OSI model. Data will travel from one computer to another on a network from the Application layer to the Physical layer on the sending computer. the OSI Model is not a protocol. Flow of Data As part of the Network+ Certification program. This communication will take place as long as both computers are using the same protocols.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide OSI and the Real World When working with the OSI model. In fact. some of the components or layers may actually do the work of several layers of the OSI Model. you must keep in mind that it was created after many popular protocols had already been developed. Its purpose is to provide a graphical image of how network protocols work together to provide communication between two computers. The following mnemonics are commonly used to help remember the layers: 64 Specialized Solutions. Inc. . you will need to know the seven layers of the OSI model. as in the case of the TCP/IP protocol.

Specialized Solutions. The OSI model simply defines which functions need to be completed at each layer and which protocols are to be used at each layer. you do need to remember the different layers and the tasks for which each layer is responsible. Inc. This is so that different types of computers with different types of hardware and software can communicate. it is the appropriate hardware or software that does the work.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards Mnemonic Away Pizza Sausage Throw Not Do Please OSI Layer Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link Physical All People Seem To Need Data Processing Mnemonic No matter how you memorize the layers. Keep in mind that it isn’t actually the layer that performs the task. The specifications describe how components are supposed to function. because each product would have to be specialized towards each type of computer or operating system. Without them we would not have as many software or hardware packages available to us. 65 . etc. These specifications make it possible for hardware and software manufacturers to create products that will function in different computing environments.

Data Link layer and the Network layer. you will usually be working in the first three layers of the OSI model: The Physical layer. This weakening is known as attenuation. Routers Routers operate at the Network layer of the OSI model. The networking professional needs to be familiar with these devices.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Devices and the OSI Model As a networking professional. Inc. and gateways are the most common devices that are used to expand a network. Repeaters A repeater operates at the Physical layer of the OSI model. routers. etc. . Bridges A bridge operates at the Data Link layer of the OSI model. bridges. A repeater amplifies these signals so that they can travel further or across LANs.25 IPX/SPX SNAP PPP PPTP XNS Protocols DECnet The following is a list of NON-ROUTABLE protocols: • • • NetBEUI DLC LAT 66 Specialized Solutions. Bridges connect two separate networks to form one logical network. as well as where in the OSI model they operate. Most routers today support multiple protocols such as: TCP/IP SNA SLIP X. As electrical signals travel across a network medium the signal weakens as a result of resistance from the cabling itself. They rely on MAC addressing to forward messages to their destination. Repeaters. Routers are responsible for using logical addresses to move packets from one network to another and deliver them to a host. Programmers usually deal with the upper layers and decide what protocols. It regenerates or amplifies a signal across LANs. are going to be used when they write a program. These are the layers that have the most to do with hardware devices and other components that you can change.

Inc. which can be used to connect an IBM mainframe computer to a Microsoft network. However. Brouters A brouter operates at both the Data Link and Network layers of the OSI model. Gateways Gateways operate in the upper layers of the OSI model (from the Transport to Application layers. Specialized Solutions. A computer with special software serves as a gateway and allows for communication between completely dissimilar networks. A popular example is an SNA Gateway. A gateway connects two computer networks that use different protocols or even different technologies. 67 . but usually in the Application layer). If a routable packet is received the brouter will route it using a routing table (make intelligent decisions of how best to route the data). the brouter will bridge the packet based on its MAC addressing. It is a device that combines the functions of the bridge and router.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards Each router has its own table that defines all routes connected to it. if a packet is received from a computer using a nonroutable protocol such as NetBEUI. Router tables can be entered manually by a network administrator or they can be dynamically updated using routing protocols such as RIP and OSPF. The gateway translates between the two networks so that they may communicate.

Inc.11 802.12 Defines Internetworking Logical Link Control (LLC) Carrier Sense with Multiple Access and Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) Token Bus LAN Token Ring LAN Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) Broadband Technical Advisory Group Fiber Optic Technical Advisory Group Integrated Voice/Data Networks Network Security Wireless Networks Demand Priority Access LAN.6 802.1 802. These standards were prepared before the OSI standards. The following table lists the 802 standards by category: (The ones you need to know are the ones in bold!) Number 802.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide IEEE 802 Standards In 1980 the Institute for Electrical and Electronic Engineers. and if you would like more information on them. 68 Specialized Solutions.10 802.4 802. This project is known as the 802 project (named for the year and month the project started.ieee.3 802. but the two sets of standards were designed to be compatible.5 802. Inc.standards. .8 802. visit IEEE’s web-site at http://www.org There are also many other web sites that discuss these standards.9 802. a little surfing might be in order. February 1980). 100BaseVG AnyLAN If you would like more information on these standards.2 802.7 802. (IEEE) formed a committee to create standards for LANs.

69 .Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards Specialized Solutions. Inc.

This way more than one protocol stack can be bound to a single NIC. Network 70 Specialized Solutions. and it defines the interface between the Data Link layer NIC driver and the network transport protocol. However. NDIS and ODI are incompatible with one another. Two sets of standards have been developed to define the interfaces between the NIC and the driver. It defines a way to bind more than one protocol to a single driver. which will allow a NIC to support multiple protocols. The purpose of these standards is to allow operating system vendors (such as Microsoft and Novell) to write multiple drivers for the same NIC. NDIS (Network Driver Interface Specification) NDIS was co-developed by Microsoft and 3Com Corp. the NIC also needs a device driver to function. Protocols and OSI Protocols are the rules that govern communication between computers. This vendor-neutral interface provides a boundary between a protocol and the driver. The NIC driver operates at the Media Access Control (MAC) sub-layer of the Data Link layer of the OSI model. but is designed for use with Novell NetWare and Macintosh environments. This is because of the way they work within the OSI layers (on top of one another). which allows any NDIS-compatible protocol stack to function with any NDIS-compatible driver.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Drivers and the OSI Model Just like every other device in a computer. the network. . The driver allows communication between the operating system and the NIC. and hence. Inc. ODI (Open Data Link Interface) ODI was co-developed by Novell and Apple and serves the same purpose as NDIS. The protocols used to communicate in a network environment are called protocol suites or stacks.

the data is simply sent and assumed to be received. it would be like calling your friend and simply leaving a message on his answering machine. the operating system will attempt to communicate using TCP/IP first. Network protocols reside in the lower layers of the OSI model and handle the addressing and routing functions of network communication. Connection-Oriented vs. It is possible to bind two protocols to one NIC (such as TCP/IP and IPX/SPX) or to have two NICs with one protocol bound to each one. Routable vs.) The order in which these protocols are bound to the NIC determines which one the network operating system will attempt to use first. Protocols that are unable to send messages across routers are called Non-Routable. 71 .Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards protocols are responsible for addressing and routing communication over a network. In connection-oriented communication. If that fails. They also handle error checking and acknowledgments of transmitted data. The receiving computer acknowledges that it received the data that was sent. This binding process is what links the protocol stacks to the NIC driver. Protocols that are able to route messages across these devices are called Routable. but connection-oriented is more reliable. and in full. It is the protocol operating at a certain OSI layer that defines that layer’s function. This form of communication protocol guarantees the delivery of data. Transport layer protocols reside in the middle layers of the OSI model and are responsible for establishing sessions and ensuring that data is sent and received error free. Connection-oriented would be like dialing up your friend to ask them to come to a party. You have no confirmation (unless he calls you back) that he received the message. Network protocols work at various layers of the OSI model. Non-Routable Protocols In the early days of networking. (This is useful if your network communicates with another entirely dissimilar network. Specialized Solutions. it will then attempt to communicate with the second protocol. Protocol Binding In order to function. a protocol must be bound to the NIC. There is no guarantee that the message was delivered. it is not uncommon for more than one LAN to be connected using a router. Application layer protocols provide support for application-to-application functions in the upper layers of the OSI Model. if TCP/IP is bound first. In a connectionless scenario. In today’s LANs however. For example. LANs were usually just one network that served a single company or department. the sending and receiving computers actually establish a connection to communicate. Connectionless Communication between computers may be connection-oriented or connectionless. Inc. In a connectionless communication. Connectionless communication is faster. The network layer protocols also are responsible for error checking (CRC) functions. You speak directly to your friend who either agrees or disagrees to come.

Networking Protocols and Stacks The following are common routable networking protocol stacks. It is important that the networking professional know the difference between routable and non-routable protocols and which protocols are routable.25 XNS Protocols The following is a list of NON-ROUTABLE protocols: • • • DLC LAT NetBEUI Non-routable protocols cannot be used in routed environments (such as the Internet). . 72 Specialized Solutions. you should be familiar with these protocol stacks and you should know the OSI layer in which their components function. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide The following is a list (in alphabetical order) of some routable protocols: • • • • • • • • • • • • AppleTalk DECnet IPX/ SPX PPP PPTP SLIP SMB SNA TCP/IP UDP X. As a networking professional.

and handles file and print services. At the Application layer it handles application interfaces. It has been modified over the years and now contains the following components: • IPX (Internetwork Packet Exchange) – Works on the Network layer of the OSI model and provides connectionless service. regardless of speed. It chooses the route with the fewest hops. LSL (Link Support Layer) – Also resides at the Data Link layer and provides the interface between the MLID and the upper layers. NCP (NetWare Control Protocol) – This control protocol resides at four different layers of the OSI model. MLID (Multiple Link Interface Driver) – Resides in the Data Link layer in the MAC sub-layer. this protocol takes into consideration link speed and network traffic to make more efficient routing decisions than RIP. (If data must cross a router SPX is used. RIP (Routing Information Protocol) – This is a simple routing protocol that counts the hops needed to reach a destination. IPX/ SPX This protocol is the proprietary protocol that was developed by Novell for Netware servers and clients. At the Presentation Specialized Solutions. Inc. This is the NIC driver in the IPX/SPX suite. 73 • • • • • • . It is a routable protocol that can also use TCP/IP and OSI protocols. NLSP (NetWare Link Services Protocol) – This Network layer protocol is also a routing protocol. It resides in the Network layer. It resides in the Network layer.) SPX (Sequenced Packet Exchange) – Is a Transport layer protocol and is a connection-oriented protocol. It uses the MAC address and is non-routable.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards AppleTalk This proprietary protocol stack allows Macintosh systems to operate in a network environment. This stack consists of: • • • • AppleShare – Provides Application layer services for Macintosh. Datagram Delivery Protocol (DDP) – Provides transmission of packets across a network. AppleTalk Filing Protocol (AFP) – Manages file sharing at the Application layer AppleTalk Transaction Protocol (ATP) – Provides connection between two computers at the Transport layer. In addition to hop count. DECnet This is Digital Equipment Corporation’s protocol stack. It is a routable protocol.

while APPN provides Network and Transport layer connections. NWLink – This Transport layer protocol is Microsoft’s version of IPX/SPX. Missing packets and out-of-sequence data is not checked and no acknowledgements are sent. APPC supports Transport and Session layer services. 74 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide layer it handles data translation. SMB (Server Message Block) This Microsoft protocol operates at the Presentation layer and is used for communication between the server and the redirector. It is routable and provides support for NetBIOS names. . FTP (File Transfer Protocol) This protocol is used for file sharing between computers on a TCP/IP network. and connection-oriented error control services. Inc. At the Transport layer it handles sequencing. It is faster than TCP because it is connectionless. SNA (Systems Network Architecture) This protocol suite is used with IBM mainframes and AS/400 systems. IP (Internet Protocol) IP is a connectionless protocol. TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) The TCP/IP suite contains two major protocols. The two main protocols in this stack are APPC (Advanced Peer-to-Peer Communications) and APPN (Advanced Peer-to-Peer Networking). TCP and IP. FTP is an Application layer protocol and is available for nearly every operating system. It operates at the Network layer of the OSI model and is responsible for addressing packets and routing them over the network. flow control. • SAP (Service Access Protocol) – This Application layer protocol is used on servers to broadcast (at specified intervals) the location and services that are available from that server. It is used to upload and download files on the Internet and between two computers. No error checking exists and delivery is not guaranteed. TCP is responsible for adding header information that contains error checking and flow control information. It also contains several others that the networking professional needs to be familiar with. Novell Netware 5. We will cover TCP/IP extensively in Chapters 8 & 9. At the Session layer it establishes and controls sessions. • Many companies use Netware with the TCP/IP protocol stack. TCP functions at the Transport layer of the OSI model and is a connection-oriented protocol.1 and later installs TCP/IP by default. It is also layered on IP like TCP. so the application must do the error checking and retransmission if necessary. UDP (User Datagram Protocol) UDP provides the datagram service in TCP/IP. A datagram is a kind of packet that has minimum overhead.

but in addition. ARP will first check its table and if a matching address is not found. OSPF counts the number of hops to the destination computer. Telnet can also be used for remote configuration of servers and network devices such as routers and switches. OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) Like RIP. SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) SMTP is an Application layer protocol that is responsible for sending E-mail from the sender’s server to the recipient’s E-mail server. this is also a Network layer protocol. it will broadcast on the local subnet to determine the MAC address of the computer with the associated IP address.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards TFTP (Trivial File Transfer Protocol) Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) is used for transferring files quickly and more simply than the File Transfer Protocol (FTP). It is less capable than FTP because it uses UDP rather than TCP. Specialized Solutions. Telnet This Application layer protocol allows a user to log on and run applications remotely. instead of only the number of hops. RARP (Reverse Address Resolution Protocol) is a related protocol that performs the same function. The local computer acts as a display only and all processing occurs remotely. ARP keeps a table of corresponding IP and MAC addresses that have been resolved in the previous 10 minutes. ARP will add the information to its table for future use. The computer that has the corresponding IP address will respond to the broadcast by sending its MAC address. Inc. then TFTP would be advisable over FTP. 75 . It resides in the Network layer. ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) ARP is responsible for resolving IP addresses to MAC addresses. but in reverse. It uses Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) to synchronize computer clock times to a millisecond. It is designed to be reliable and allows for scalability. it also takes into consideration the network speed and traffic and makes routing decisions based on the best route. It is an Application layer protocol. NFS (Network File System) Sun Microsystems developed NFS as a file and drive sharing system. NTP (Network Time Protocol) Network Time Protocol (NTP) is used in a networked environment to synchronize computer clock times. It chooses the route with the fewest hops. If you do not need to use passwords. making it connectionless. RIP (Routing Information Protocol) RIP (Routing Information Protocol) – This is a simple routing protocol that counts the hops that will be needed to reach a destination. It operates like a combination of Telnet and FTP and allows users to access files and drives on remote computers as if they were local resources. without regard to speed.

DLC (Data Link Control) DLC operates at the Data Link layer of the OSI model.25 is a packet switching protocol that is sometimes referred to as a public data network (PDN) because it is sometimes used by more than one organization. asynchronous terminal traffic over a LAN. This is an older packet switching network that uses switches and circuits. This is really a type of network that is owned by telephone companies who charge organizations for use. which can be unreliable due to the quality of phone lines. Data is routed via the best connection at a given time.25 X. packets are re-examined to determine whether they are damaged.25 functions take place at the Physical and Network layers and normally interface with a protocol called LAPB (Link Access Procedures-Balanced). LAT (Local Area Transport) LAT does not have a Network layer. Non-Routable Protocols The following protocols are non-routable. The first specification refers to the DTE (Data Terminal Equipment).25 a very slow but very reliable protocol. It is typically used between a DECserver and a VAX minicomputer.25 network. At each stop.25 network is sometimes referred to as a cloud. It uses standard telephone lines and switches. but in between. The second part of the specification is the DCE (Data Communications Equipment). Because of this. It was originally used to connect IBM mainframes to HP network printers. This is not an actual protocol and is not used to perform networking functions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide X. XNS (Xerox Network System) XNS is a proprietary protocol developed by Xerox for their Ethernet LANs. Instead. This is the host on an X. Packets from the same transmission are routed via the best route (and don’t necessarily follow the same route) and are reassembled at the receiving end. X. This means that they may not be used with networks that use routers to connect multiple LANs. . This also means that they may not be used to connect to the Internet. 76 Specialized Solutions. This means that routes change as conditions change. making X. It is bulky and slow and has largely been replaced by TCP/IP. X. only printing functions.25 is also an equipment specification. it is out of the administrator’s control. it is installed only on the print server and communicates directly with the printer. It is a DEC protocol used for interactive. Data goes in and comes out. The DTE acts as an endpoint for communications and the DCE acts as an entry point for the DTEs. In addition. This protocol is not used for data communication. Inc. which is the main reason that it is non-routable. the X.

which is an advantage if using older MS-DOS-based systems. easy to configure and small. 77 . It may be used with bridges. but is primarily used today for backward compatibility with existing networks. It is fast.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface) This non-routable protocol works at the Transport layer of the OSI model. Specialized Solutions. Inc.

Like a traffic report on your radio. ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) ICMP is used in error-handling and control procedures. PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) This is an extension to the PPP protocol. It maintains a database and provides hostname to IP address resolution. it detects congested areas and links that are down.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Other Protocols The following are other protocols with which you should be familiar: SLIP (Serial Line Internet Protocol) SLIP supports TCP/IP connections made over serial lines. file transfers. PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) This protocol was developed to replace the SLIP protocol and alleviate some of its limitations. NetBEUI. ISO/OSI Standard This is a complete standard with each layer having a protocol (or protocols) mapped directly to it. PPTP encapsulates TCP/IP. RPC (Remote Procedure Call) RPC operates at the Session layer of the OSI model. RPC is used by the redirector to 78 Specialized Solutions. It does not support IPX. but it can also be modified manually by the network administrator. SNMP is used extensively with intelligent hubs. enabling it to use the Internet as a backbone for NWLink and NetBEUI. SLIP requires static IP addressing and doesn’t support data encryption. DHCP. PPP supports IPX. It also supports data encryption. It provides full networking functions at every layer of the OSI model. SLIP is not used as much as PPP. and connection release. or DHCP. The main improvement is that it allows clients to connect remotely over the Internet. This management protocol interfaces with network analyzer software making it easier to manage complex networks. and other protocols as well as TCP/IP. . and notifies upper layers to route around them. It provides machineindependent data translations that may include encryption and data descriptions. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) Devices using TCP/IP use SNMP for controlling network communications. It handles session establishment. NWLink and NetBEUI. It operates at the Network layer of the OSI model and performs connection services and flow control services. This database is typically dynamic in today’s modern networks. administration. Users can establish secure encrypted access to their corporate networks via Virtual Private Networks (VPNs) that PPTP establishes. Inc. NetBEUI. XDR (External Data Representation) XDR handles translation and operates at the Presentation layer. DNS (Domain Name System) DNS translates names that humans understand into names that the computer understands.

79 . Inc. It makes the remote resources appear local to the computer.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards determine if a resource is local or on the network. Specialized Solutions. Note: TCP/IP is such an important protocol that we will be covering it in depth later in the text.

Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Summary In this chapter. but also help you to narrow down problems when troubleshooting a network. The OSI model is an invaluable tool to the networking professional. . 80 Specialized Solutions. we learned about the OSI model and its importance in networking. We also learned what type of devices function at various levels of the OSI model and how these devices interact with each other. It is important to note that memorizing the OSI model will not only help you pass the test. you know that networking is taking place and that you have functionality up to layer three. if you can get to the server through a router. For example.

Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. 81 . Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. Inc.x Standards Application Layer Bridge Brouter Data Link Layer Gateway LLC (Logical Link Control) MAC (Media Access Control) Network Layer Non-Routable Protocol OSI Physical Layer Presentation Layer Protocol Stack Repeater Routable Protocol Router Session Layer Transport Layer Definition Specialized Solutions. Keyword 802.

5. Name the seven layers of the OSI model. Which OSI layer is responsible for establishing. What is the function of the Application Layer? 9. 7. What is a MAC address? 13. A bridge operates at the ________ layer of the OSI model. 3. The ____________ layer is responsible for the mechanical and electrical functions of transmitting data over a network. 6. managing. Who developed the OSI model? 2. Data compression takes place at the __________ layer of the OSI. A router operates at the _________layer of the OSI model. and ending connections? 12. Which part of this MAC address is the Device ID? 00-01-A5-D3-B4-01 82 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions – Chapter 3 1. 4. What is the function of the Presentation Layer? 11. 10. Inc. . Which OSI layer is responsible for the MAC address? 8. A network adapter card operates at the _____ layer of the OSI Model.

without duplication and error free? 16. What are they? 17. The Data Link layer has been split into two sub-layers. 23. Which OSI layer makes routing decisions? 15. Name as many routable protocols as you can remember. 21. What is the function of a Gateway? 18.Chapter 3 – The OSI Model and Communication Standards 14. What are NDIS and ODI? 20. Which IEEE standard defines the Logical Link Control (LLC) sub-layer? 19. Which OSI layer is responsible for delivering data in sequence. Describe protocol binding. You have expanded your NetBEUI network into two segments and are using an intelligent router to optimize network traffic. Will this work? Why or Why not? Specialized Solutions. 83 . Inc. connection-oriented communication or connectionless communication? 22. Which is faster.

.

There are numerous kinds of cable. a braided metallic shield called the ground as well as an outer cover. and how wireless networks function are among the topics we will cover in this chapter.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Chapter 4 . It is not often used in today’s networks. video. and the hardware aspect of network operations.Hardware Media and Peripherals This chapter explores network media. which we will address here. Specialized Solutions. or DIX (Digital. (and we’ll cover them later in this chapter). Coaxial Cable Coaxial cable consists of a copper core (either solid or stranded) surrounded by plastic foam insulation. Coaxial cable is used in Ethernet Networks. it is less susceptible to EMI than UTP. most networks utilize some type of cable to carry transmissions on the network. There are several cabling options. network adapter cards. Thicknet Thicknet is about ½-inch thick and fairly rigid. and data over longer distances that UTP or STP. but may still be used in some temporary installations such as a construction trailer (although wireless would be a much more likely alternative). It can transmit voice. Thinnet Thinnet is about ¼-inch thick and is flexible and easy to install. It also has a transmission speed of 10 Mbps. along with connectors. Xerox). It has a maximum segment length of 185 meters (about 606 feet) and a transmission speed of 10 Mbps. Because it is shielded. Inc. How to properly configure and use network adapter cards. and other hardware and peripherals. 85 . Intel. 10Base2 (Thinnet) and 10Base5 (Thicknet) in a Bus topology. Its copper core is thicker than Thinnet and can carry signals farther (maximum segment length is 500 meters or about 1650 feet). It uses a BNC (British Naval Connector) “T” connector to connect directly to the NIC. Network Cabling Although wireless networks do exist. which is more commonly known as a DB-15 connector. The drop cable is connected to the NIC’s AUI (Attachment Unit Interface) port connector. but fortunately for the networking professional there are only three major types that you need to understand. It uses a device called a transceiver to connect the Thicknet cable to the NIC via a drop cable. The effect of hardware on network performance will be key to your networking operation. Understanding how different network topologies interact with different types of cable is essential.

all electronic components must operate at the same impedance. It is attached directly to the NIC but allows network signal to flow straight through it as well as to the NIC. Using the wrong cable will cause poor performance and/or failure of the network. They are specified based on their impedance. . It is expressed in ohms. Summary of Coaxial Cables Not all coaxial cables are the same. it has been replaced by twisted-pair cable and fiber optic cable. Inc. BNC Cable Connectors BNC T Connector The BNC T connector is used to connect the network interface card to the cable. As a networking professional you will need to be familiar with the different types and their uses. it is not as easy to install. In order for the network to operate at peak performance. Impedance is a unit of measurement for resistance to AC voltages. In today’s networks. Uses 10Base5 Thicknet 10Base5 Thicknet 10Base2 Thinnet Cable TV ARCnet Type RG-8 RG-11 RG-58 RG-59 RG-62 Impedance – Ohms 50 50 50 75 93 Coaxial Connectors British Naval Connectors (BNC) are used in both Thinnet and Thicknet networks to connect the cable to the computers.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Because it is thicker than Thinnet. as well as how they are attached to the cables. In the past. Thicknet was used as a backbone to connect several Thinnet networks. 86 Specialized Solutions.

87 . This cable is called a drop cable or a transceiver cable. The BNC terminator is a connector that has a resistor built in that performs this function. A transceiver is a device that transmits and receives signals on a network medium. It is common to connect a Thinnet LAN to a Thicknet backbone using a transceiver. The transceiver has a port for an AUI connector (AUI port connectors are also called DIX connectors or DB-15 connectors). Specialized Solutions. N Connector Transceivers The computers in a Thicknet network do not connect directly to the cable as with Thinnet.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals BNC Barrel Connector The BNC barrel connector is used to connect two lengths of Thinnet cable together. and an AUI cable. One of the terminators must be grounded. BNC Terminator Both ends of the cable must be terminated to absorb signals and eliminate signal bounce. Both ends of the cable need to be terminated with one end grounded. Thicknet uses a device called a transceiver. It is soldered or crimped onto the cable to make the connection. Inc. BNC Connectors N Connectors Thicknet uses N connectors that screw on. and is used to connect the device to the network.

Instead. It is flexible and easy to install and is the least expensive of all the cable types.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Transceiver Vampire Taps Although transceivers can be connected by cutting a cable and splicing N connectors and T connectors on the transceiver. There are four pair strands in most twisted-pair cables. Inc. Vampire Tap Twisted-Pair Cable Twisted-pair cable has become the most popular type of cable used in networks today. The twist helps 88 Specialized Solutions. This cable type consists of insulated pair strands of copper wire that are twisted around one another. These clamp-on transceivers were often referred to as vampire taps because they utilized sharp teeth that punctured the cable to make the connection. most networking professionals used a clamp-on transceiver. this was time-consuming and it absorbed signal so it was not the common approach. . This types of connections have been largely replaced by newer cable methods such as twisted-pair and fiber optic cable.

it is more sensitive to EMI. there are six categories. Category 5 UTP has a transmission speed of up to 100 Mbps. There are two types of twisted-pair cables: Unshielded Twisted-Pair (UTP) and Shielded Twisted-Pair (STP). This results in less sensitivity to EMI. The quality of UTP is based on the number of twists per meter in each pair of wires.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals prevent crosstalk and sensitivity to EMI. 89 . Category 3 cabling has a transmission speed of 10 Mbps. Since it is unshielded. The following is a summary of UTP cables. the faster the signal can be sent through the wires without crosstalk. The tighter the twist. UTP wire typically consists of eight wires or four pairs. The telephone wire we have all seen in our homes is an example of twisted-pair cabling. It has a maximum segment length of 100 meters. UTP Unshielded Twisted-Pair (UTP) cabling is the less expensive of the twisted-pair cable types and hence the most popular. Twisted Pair Cabling Specialized Solutions. Category 1 2 3 4 5 5e 6 Maximum Data Rate Less than 1 Mbps 4 Mbps 16 Mbps 20 Mbps 100 Mbps 1000 Mbps 1000 Mbps Uses Doorbell Wiring Token Ring and Voice 10BaseT and Token Ring Token Ring ATM and Gigabit Ethernet ATM and Gigabit Ethernet Extremely fast broadband STP Shielded Twisted-Pair (STP) cabling is insulated with a foil mesh between the wire pairs. Inc. Currently.

Inc. RJ-45 Connector AppleTalk AppleTalk networks utilizing STP cabling uses a DIN-type (DB-9) connector. Expandable patch panels (sometimes called punch down blocks) are also used with UTP installations. The front of the patch panel contains RJ-45 ports (a port is a female counterpart for the RJ-45 jack). This gives the network administrator a greater degree of flexibility and provides fault tolerance for the network cabling system. They come in various sizes up to 96 ports and support transmission speeds of up to 10 Gbps . This is an excellent way to organize network cables. The RJ-45 jack’s position can therefore be changed from patch panel to patch panel to use a different set of cables for the same connection. An RJ-11 jack has four connection points where an RJ-45 jack has eight. Distribution Panels Distribution racks and shelves are sometimes used to create more room for cables when floor space is at a premium. Wall Plates for RJ-45 90 Specialized Solutions. . An RJ-45 connector looks just like a common telephone jack (RJ-11) only larger. These patch panels act like a switchboard where cables are connected and organized. The pin location is a color-coded slot into which the wire is punched down using a special tool punch down tool to make the proper connection by stripping the insulation from the wire without breaking the wire. The wire is assembled in the back of the patch panel in what is called the pin location.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Twisted-Pair Connectors UTP and STP are usually connected with RJ-45 connectors. Wall plates are typically used to make the connection to the computers themselves.

Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Fiber-Optic Cable Fiber-optic cable is the ideal cabling for networking. Because of this feature. This cladding reflects the signal back into the fiber. One strand transmits and one receives. Fiber-optic cable consists of a glass core surrounded by a coating of cladding (layer of glass or plastic). Signals are sent along the cable as pulses of light. . They do not conform to the same specification as used with standard UTP. IBM cabling is based on its Type. as it is the most expensive and most difficult to install of all the cabling types. 91 . SC Connector (for Fiber Optic Cable) ST Connector (for Fiber Optic Cable) Because data is transmitted as light and not as electrical impulses. which reduces signal loss.) Because data only passes in one direction over fiber-optic cable. which is easier to install. but plastic core fiber-optic cannot carry the signals as far as glass. It also supports much longer segment lengths (several miles). the data cannot be tapped or stolen. it is therefore not as common as UTP. (The core can also be made up of plastic. it consists of two separate strands enclosed in a plastic jacket for strength. However. It supports extremely high bandwidths and is not subject to EMI. The following is a summary of IBM Types: Specialized Solutions. IBM Cabling IBM has its own special cabling for use on their Token Ring networks. Inc.. fiber-optic is used in networks that need a secure media that transmits at high speeds over long distances.

Cannot be used for 16 Mbps Token Ring. . Same as type 1 but adds voice capability along with data.5/125-micron multimode fibers. Six twisted pairs. Two STP – 26 AWG Wire Not Defined Two STP – 26 AWG Wire Two STP –26 AWG Wire Uses Connect between terminals and distribution boxes or between different wiring closets. two STP and four UTP – maximum length 100 meters (328 feet). Plenum grade. IBM has developed its own cabling complete with its own standards and specifications. An IBM connector is sometimes called a hermaphrodite. IBM Connector 92 Specialized Solutions. Inc. These are very rarely used in today’s modern networks. Not Defined Two 62. Contains a shield for use under carpets.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Type 1 Wire Specs Two STP solid core 22 AWG wires – maximum length 101 meters (331 feet). The connector that they developed is unique in that any connector can connect to another as opposed to having “male” and “female” connectors as with other types of connectors. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Fiber Optic Data patch cables. Lower cost alternative to type 1 or 2. Four UTP with two twists per inch – 22 or 24 AWG wire – maximum cable length is 45 meters (148 feet).

Inc.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Summary of Cabling The following table summarizes the specifications for network media: Media Bandwidth (Mbps) Nodes/ Segment 1 Varies 100 30 1 NA Maximum Nodes per Network 1024 260 300 90 1024 Varies Maximum Cable Length (meters) 100 100 500 185 2000 32 UTP STP Coaxial Thicknet Coaxial Thinnet Fiber Optic Infrared 4-100 16-155 10 10 2000 1-10 Note: We will discuss Infrared later in this chapter. Specialized Solutions. 93 .

the wire thickness increases. 94 Specialized Solutions. but cannot send a message. PVC is used for the outer cover and the insulation in Polyvinyl Chloride grade cabling. 10-gauge wire is heavier than 14-gauge wire. these fumes would circulate throughout a building in the event of a fire. For example.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Cabling Terms The following are terms that you will encounter when working with network cabling: AWG (American Wire Gauge) AWG is the standard that describes wire thickness. The signal flow is uni-directional. Full-Duplex allows for two-way simultaneous transmissions. The signal flow is bidirectional. Duplex • • Simplex refers to one-way communication only. Coaxial cable comes in two grades: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Plenum. As the AWG wire number decreases. a pager can receive a message. Both you and the party you are talking to can talk and listen at the same time. the telephone utilizes full-duplex transmissions. (send and receive) but only one at a time. For example. • Simplex vs. Broadband There are two techniques that are used to transmit signals over cable: • Baseband uses the entire capacity of the cable as a single channel.Baseband vs. Broadband allows two or more channels to share the bandwidth of the cable or medium. Half-Duplex can send transmissions both ways. If this type of cable were used in the plenum. Typical STP and UTP wires are 24-gauge. Because this space does circulate air through a building. fire codes are very specific about what types of cabling can be run in this space. Bandwidth Bandwidth is a term used to measure the ability of a network medium to transmit data. Inc. For example. It is used with digital and utilizes TDM (Time Division Multiplexing). Bandwidth is measured in megabits per seconds (Mbps) or gigabits per second (Gbps). An example would be a CB radio transmission where only one person can talk at a time. • Plenum Grade Cabling A plenum is the space between the ceiling and the floor above. PVC grade cable is less expensive than Plenum grade cable but it gives off poisonous smoke and gas when burned. . This space is used to circulate air through a building. It is used with analog and utilizes TDM (Frequency Division Multiplexing).

95 . such as: • • • • • Budget Network Traffic Security Needs Size/Distance Environment The installation parameters need to be considered as well.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals In contrast.) Specialized Solutions. It is therefore specifically designed to be used in these circulation areas. shielded cable or fiber optic cable might be more appropriate. A networking professional must be aware of local fire codes regarding plenum cabling. Plenum grade cable is insulated and jacketed in special materials that give off a minimum amount of smoke and fumes. how will the cable need to be installed? (If there are tight corners. local fire codes will need to be addressed. the flexibility of the medium should be considered. For example.) Will plenum grade cable need to be purchased? (If installing cabling in the plenum. There are many factors that you must consider if you are to meet your networking objectives. Inc. Plenum Grade Cables Selecting Cables As a networking professional you will need to determine which kind of cabling medium to use for a given network.) Will the cable be installed in “noisy” areas where EMI will be a factor? (If installing the cable near equipment or fluorescent lighting.

. Is future growth of the network expected? (Expandability for future growth is easier to achieve if it is planned for in advance. last but not least. Building a low-cost network that doesn’t do the job won’t win you any brownie points in the long run! 96 Specialized Solutions.) If security is an issue on the network and the data to be transmitted needs to be secure. cost are issues that will need to be addressed when planning your network. there is no need to use heavy duty cabling when another type would be more cost-effective. fiber-optic cabling might be appropriate to avoid any tapping. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide How long will the cable runs need to be? (If the network will be small. attenuation could have an affect on network performance if you use cabling on a large network where long cable runs are a factor.) Transmission speeds and. On the other hand.

and controls the flow of data on the network. Signals and Clocking In order to understand how a NIC works. Signals There are two types of signals: Analog: Signals or waveforms that frequently take the form of sine waves. Network cabling moves data in a single data stream. Specialized Solutions. It makes the physical connection to the network. Inc. (And of course to translate it back again.) This card is installed into an expansion slot on every computer on the network and the cable is connected to the card’s port. Analog data has an infinite number of possible states. NICs are used to connect the computer to the network. Data traveling via a computer’s bus is traveling in parallel because the bits are traveling along side-by-side. Signals are sent in a continuous flow that represents the start and stop of a data frame. We’ll discuss the different data bus architectures a little later. most buses are 16-bit or 32-bit. Older computers had 8-bit buses which meant that data could be sent 8-bits at a time. Because these paths are side-by-side. This is known as serial communication. Preparing the Data Computers carry data internally via data pathways called buses. you need to have a basic understanding of signals and clocking. are also known as Network Adapter Cards. data is moved along in groups.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Network Interface Cards (NICs) Network Interface Cards or NICs. Today. Digital: Signals that are simple 1’s (on). Clocking Clocking is the method used by the NIC to count and pace the number of signals that it sends and receives. The NIC takes data coming from the computer in parallel form and converts it into serial data so that it can be sent along the network cable. The purpose of this card is to translate the data that the computer can understand into signals that can be transmitted over the network medium. which constantly vary in one or more values. This is how the NIC keeps track of how much data has been sent or received. handles network addressing. 97 . or 0’s (off). This is known as parallel communication.

the data is sent to the card’s RAM (buffer) until it can be processed. This makes transferring data much faster. Once all of these parameters are agreed upon. How much data each card can hold before overflow occurs. DMA allows the NIC to access the computer directly without having to go through the CPU.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Addressing/MAC Address The NIC is also responsible for encoding the signals it sends out on the network medium with its unique MAC address. Configurable Options In order for the computer to communicate with the NIC. . the two cards start sending and receiving data. the NIC may need to be configured. DMA (Direct Memory Channel) The NIC must be able to communicate with the computer in order to prepare data for transmission on a network medium. Plug-and-Play cards configure themselves to be compatible with the 98 Specialized Solutions. Before transmission actually takes place the NICs agree on the following points: • • • • • • The maximum size of the groups of data to be sent. Most computers utilize Direct Memory Access (DMA) and the computer assigns some of its memory space for use by the NIC. If one card is faster or more sophisticated than another card. The amount of data that will be sent before a confirmation. they agree on common parameters so that the data is sent at a speed that can be handled by the slowest card. The NIC signals the computer to send the data that it wants to transmit and the computer’s bus moves the data from memory to the NIC. The amount of time between confirmations. a NIC will send data over the network to the receiving card. The speed of the transmission. The time intervals between data chunks. This informs the other computers on the network of its location. Inc. Data often moves faster than a NIC can process it. Each NIC has a unique address that is hardwired onto it by the manufacturer. Controlling the Data Flow Before transmitting. The IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) committee assigns blocks of these unique numbers to each manufacturer. When this occurs. This communication takes place so that both the sending and receiving cards can agree on data flow and confirmation parameters.

These hexadecimal port numbers define a channel between a device and the processor. Specialized Solutions. Some of these settings are configured by using DIP switches or jumper settings. The main concept to understand is that the NIC is set up to use an IRQ that is not already assigned to another device. This is sometimes referred to as the RAM start address. Other cards will need to be configured manually. Typically IRQ5 is used for the network adapter card. Inc. Base I/O Port Address This is the channel through which data flows between a computer’s hardware (like a NIC) and the CPU. The operating system and the NIC need to have compatible resource settings. such as: IRQ (Interrupt Request) The Interrupt Request (IRQ) line is used by the NIC (and other devices) to contact the CPU. Check your system’s documentation for assignment and availability of base I/O port addresses. See Appendix A for common IRQ assignments. these devices can access the memory that they need without interrupting the processor. Having an IRQ conflict (more than one device sharing an IRQ) can cause problems. Each device must have a unique base I/O port number. certain IRQs are almost always used for specific devices. IRQ3 and IRQ15 may also be used if IRQ5 is already assigned.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals operating system so that they may utilize the system’s resources. Only devices like NIC cards that need this type of memory access are assigned DMA channels. while others do not use RAM addresses at all. The device is constantly listening to this channel for commands from the processor. DMA channels are used by devices that frequently need access to large amounts of memory. These IRQ lines are part of the system hardware and each device needs its own line. Some NICs have settings that allow you to specify the size of the buffer. The most important thing to remember about IRQs is that typically no two devices can use the same interrupt. In practice. and some are set using software. With a DMA channel. 99 . The good news is that unlike an IRQ. DMA Channel Configuration of Direct Memory Access (DMA) channels is similar to IRQs. The main difference is that there are only eight DMA channels available. See Appendix A for common address assignments. Check your system’s documentation to determine its current IRQ settings. Base Memory Address The base memory address marks the location in a computer’s RAM of the beginning of the buffer area that is reserved for use by a device. in this case the NIC. not all devices need one. This buffer area is used to store incoming and outgoing data frames.

Wireless NICs Wireless NICs are used to connect wireless network systems to the computer. Inc. RJ-45. or both). Wireless LANs are discussed later in this chapter. Special software is usually needed to connect a wireless NIC. . Fiber-Optic NICs Due to the high-cost of fiber-optic adapter cards. 100 Specialized Solutions. Connector Type Your NIC may automatically adjust to use the kind of connector that you are using (BNC. they are usually only used in special cases where high-speed direct computer to fiber-optic cable connections are required. The two speeds available are 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps. If the correct ring speed is not set a computer will not be able to connect to the network and may even cause the network to fail. or you may have to configure it manually. They usually use a type of antenna (omnidirectional) and an antenna cable.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Ring Speed In Token-Ring networks the ring speed must be set on the NIC.

The Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) is a 32-bit bus. including network connectivity. Standard Bus Types There are six data bus architectures found in Intel-based computers: The Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) is an 16-bit bus. They are generally 32-bit buses. Today most buses are either EISA or PCI. Laptops PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) are credit card sized expansion buses that are used in portable computers. With this card comes the same expandability enjoyed by desktop PCs.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Data Bus Architecture A data bus is a group of parallel conductors (circuit traces) found on the motherboard that is used by the CPU to send and receive data from all the devices in the computer. Micro Channel (MCA) is a 32 bit bus. They are also called PC-Card Buses. but can be a 64-bit bus. The Extended Industry Standard Architecture (EISA) is a 32-bit bus. Micro Channel is a data bus developed by IBM that requires licensing to be used by manufacturers and isn’t used much. 101 . Specialized Solutions. Inc.

The data would then move directly to system memory leaving the CPU free to process other tasks. thereby improving network performance. Some NICs have onboard microprocessors that eliminate the need of the computer’s CPU to process data. Shared System Memory is a method by which the NIC utilizes a portion of the computer’s memory to process data. This type of card is expensive. Shared Adapter Memory is a method by which a NIC contains RAM that it shares with the computer as if it were actually installed in the computer. This is a method by which the NIC takes temporary control over a computer’s bus. it is important that it is configured correctly and optimally. thereby bypassing the CPU. RAM Buffering holds data in RAM chips that are located on the NIC until it can be processed. Without this feature. Most cards offer features that are designed to improve network performance: Utilizing Direct Memory Access (DMA) improves network performance by allowing the computer to move data directly to the NIC’s buffer without going through the CPU. but investing in one can increase network performance by 20 to 70 percent. Both EISA and MCA NICs offer Bus Mastering. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Performance Because of the effect that the NIC can have on network performance. 102 Specialized Solutions. . Network traffic travels faster than most NICs can process data. the NIC would be a bottleneck.

the office. A wireless system can help ensure that the network will still function even in the event of cable breaks. – hubs). making them ideal for uses that require frequent moving. For example. Sometimes wireless systems are used to connect to remote locations such as ocean dwelling oil platforms.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Wireless Networks The term wireless network implies that it is a network that doesn’t use any cabling. or open reception areas where the cables would be visible. Wireless networks can be classified into three basic categories: • • Local Area Networks (LANs) – There are fully wireless systems. Doctors make rounds all over the hospital and are often not at their desks when they need to access their computers. Outdoor installations often utilize wireless systems. They are also useful to create a backup system for an existing network. With wireless systems. but usually the wireless components are members of a wire-based LAN. or on the road. Mobile Computing .Cellular and satellite technologies are increasing the popularity of wireless networking. Extended Local Area Networks . 103 . Mobility is another reason wireless networks are created. People who are constantly on the move are able to access their networks whether they are at home. Wireless is also an option for areas where installing cabling would be impossible or unsightly.e. a user can access the network from anywhere in the building. Inc. but through the use of an infrared or radio medium. They function just like other access points (i. This would include historical buildings where local codes would not allow renovations. Wireless networks are more portable than cabled systems. With some applications it is crucial that the network never goes down. a company needs to connect two networks located in two nearby buildings. This is misleading as most wireless networks utilize a system that consists of both cabling and wireless components. Specialized Solutions. • Why Wireless? Wireless networks are useful if you need to provide a temporary network where running cabling would not be cost effective.Wireless networks are frequently used to connect two LANs. Wireless networks use wireless access points (WAPs) to “connect” the network devices to each other.

Infrared is not sensitive to radio-frequency interference. such as windows. This involves using infrared (below Red) light to carry signals to a receiver. Infrared networks typically broadcast at about 10 Mbps. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Wireless Antennae Wireless Transmission Methods There are four basic methods of wireless transmissions: • • • • Laser Radio Microwave Infrared You use infrared transmissions every time you use your TV’s remote control. The effective distance between a transmitter and a receiver is limited to about 100 feet. These signals need to be rather strong because they can be affected by light sources. and because the transmissions are tightly focused. they are also fairly immune to eavesdropping. Infrared transmits very fast because of its high bandwidths. . Infrared Networks There are four types of infrared networks: • • • • 104 Reflective Infrared Line-of-Sight Infrared Scatter Infrared Broadband Optical Telepoint Specialized Solutions.

Inc. This type of transmission is commonly used to connect multiple LAN segments together. Narrow-Band Radio Transmission This is sometimes called single-frequency radio and is similar to broadcasting from a radio station. Line-of-Sight Infrared With this type of infrared system. it is less susceptible to eavesdropping. It does. Spread-Spectrum Radio Transmissions Because spread-spectrum broadcasts over a range of frequencies. Transmission speeds with this high-end type are competitive with cable-based systems. The transmitter and receiver are tuned into the same frequency and thus it does not require line-of-sight transmission.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Reflective Infrared With reflective infrared. the signal is beamed towards a central unit. In the direct sequence modulation method. require an FCC license and is subject to eavesdropping. as the name implies. which are then transmitted over separate frequencies. ceilings. but unblocked it can enable mobile computing over a limited range. In the hopping method. the message is broken into parts (called chips). which then routes the signal appropriately. or direct sequence modulation. The effective distance of the signal is limited to about 100 feet. however. there must be a direct line-of-sight path between the transmitter and receiver. until it reaches the receiver. Specialized Solutions. Radio Transmission Radio transmission wireless is popular with a high bandwidth at 10 Mbps. uses broadband technology. The signals can be broadcast via two methods: hopping. etc. the available frequencies are divided into hops and the transmitters and receivers “hop” from frequency to frequency for a predetermined length of time. The signal can be blocked by heavy concrete or metal walls. Scatter Infrared Transmission rates are slower with this type as the signal is designed to bounce off of walls. 105 . Broadband Optical Telepoint Broadband Optical Telepoint.

There are three forms of mobile computing: • • • Packet-Radio Networking Cellular Networking Satellite Station Networking Packet-Radio Networking Packets are sent via a satellite. This form of microwave communication is used to transmit globally. Terrestrial Microwave This is used for earth-based communication such as between two buildings. Inc. Satellite Station Networking Microwave is currently the most common of the long distance transmission methods in the US. It is used for line-of-sight communication. and only the destination device can receive and read the packet. This form of microwave communication is used to transmit over shorter distances. The packets sent are called Cellular Digital Packet Data (CDPD) and this form provides very fast communication. 106 Specialized Solutions. mobile computing is a growing technology that provides a nearly limitless range for traveling users of this type of network. .Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Microwave Due to microwave transmission capabilities. or across large flat open areas like bodies of water or deserts. Satellite Microwave This is a very expensive technology and is utilized by very large corporations who pool the billions of dollars required to develop and launch a satellite. Cellular Networking Cellular networking is achieved via the cellular phone network. These network-style packets are encoded with source and destination address information. Signals are beamed up to the satellite and then sent back down to the appropriate receiver.

Inc.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Specialized Solutions. 107 .

Fiber-Optic cable uses pulses of light to carry signals. etc. RJ-45. As a network professional. It prepares. Coaxial comes in two types: Thinnet and Thicknet. Finally.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Summary The first part of this chapter covers the various aspects of network media or cables. 108 Specialized Solutions. You should know the types of connectors used for each cable type: BNC. you should know the maximum segment lengths for each cable type. . Radio. Wireless networking is the trend of the future. it is important for you to be able to configure the network card for optimum performance. AUI. There are three primary types of cabling: Coaxial. The four basic wireless types are: Infrared. After discussing at network cabling we then took a look at the hardware that acts as the intermediary between the cabling and the computer itself. This device is called the network interface card (NIC) and provides the physical connection to the network. it is important to understand the concepts associated with wireless networks. Twisted Pair. receives. Laser. As a networking professional. In addition. Twisted Pair can be Unshielded (UTP) or Shielded (STP). Inc. we took a look at the future. transmits. and Fiber-Optic. and Microwave. and controls data flow over the network.

Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. 109 . Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. Inc. Keyword Analog Signals AWG Bandwidth Base I/O Port Address Base Memory Address Baseband BNC Connector Broadband Buffer Cellular Networking Clocking Coaxial Cable Digital Signals DMA (Direct Memory Channel) EISA Bus Fiber-Optic Cable Full-Duplex Half-Duplex IRQ ISA Bus Laser Transmissions Definition Specialized Solutions.

Inc. Definition .Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Keyword MCA Bus Microwave Transmissions Narrow-Band Radio Network Adapter Card Network Interface Card PCI Bus PCMCIA Card Plenum Reflective Infrared Ring Speed RJ-11 Connector RJ-45 Connector Satellite Microwave Scatter Infrared Shielded Twisted Pair Simplex Single-Frequency Radio Spread-Spectrum Radio Terminator Terrestrial Microwave Thicknet Thinnet Transceiver Unshielded Twisted Pair 110 Specialized Solutions.

111 . Inc.Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals Keyword Vampire Tap Definition Specialized Solutions.

What type of connectors are used with Coaxial cable? 4. What is the most expensive cable type? 13. What is the least expensive of the cable types? 112 Specialized Solutions. What type of connector is used with twisted pair cable? 12. What is the most popular of the cable types? 10. What is the maximum segment length of UTP? 8. What is the maximum segment length of Thicknet? 3. . Which twisted pair cabling is less sensitive to EMI? 11. What is the maximum segment length of Thinnet? 2.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 4 1. What is the purpose of a transceiver? 5. What is the transmission speed of category 5 cabling? 9. Inc. What is the purpose of plenum cabling? 7. How is a vampire tap connected? 6.

Chapter 4 – Hardware Media and Peripherals 14. List some advantages of fiber-optic cable.

15. What does AWG stand for and what is it?

16. Describe baseband.

17. Describe broadband.

18. What is the difference between simplex, half-duplex, and full-duplex communication?

19. What is the function of a network adapter card?

20. In Token Ring networks, what are the two ring speeds available?

21. Where would you expect to find a PCMCIA card?

22. What are some of the reasons you would need to install a wireless network?

23. What are the four basic wireless transmission types?

24. Which is the most secure type of radio wireless network?

25. Which microwave transmission type is used to transmit globally?

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

113

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide

114

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards

Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards
In previous chapters, we laid the groundwork for understanding networking and we looked at the different networking topologies and cabling options. This chapter explores the various protocols used in network communication. Access methods used by various network protocols will also be discussed, along with the way data is transmitted over a network in packets, or frames. Ethernet is one of the most popular networking architectures. In this chapter, we will discover how Ethernet works, as well as how Token-ring networks function. AppleTalk and ARCNet networks are also included in this chapter. After completing this chapter, you will have a working knowledge of the different network architectures and the access methods that they use. You will also understand how networks send data and what information is included in the frames that are transmitted across the network medium. You will develop an understanding of Ethernet networks and the IEEE standards for Ethernet. You will also know how Token Ring networks function and what hardware is required to make them function. AppleTalk and ARCNet architecture, while not as popular as Ethernet, are still important technologies that the networking professional needs to comprehend. A protocol is a language that computers use to communicate with other computers, in this case, over a network. In Chapter 3, you saw how each layer of the OSI Model has different protocols that define how the information travels. The way these protocols interact is called a protocol stack. The following main protocol stacks are the most important: • • • • • Internet Protocol Suite TCP/IP Novell NetWare’s Protocol Suite, IPX/SPX IBM’s Systems Network Architecture, SNA Digital’s DECnet Apple’s AppleTalk

The OSI Model was created at a later date than some of the aforementioned protocols; thus, they do not map directly to the OSI Model. Protocols function at three basic levels: • • Application protocols provide support for application-to-application interaction and data exchange. Transport protocols ensure that data is sent to the correct destination without errors. Specialized Solutions, Inc. 115

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide • Network protocols route information, handle addressing, and check for errors. Network protocols also set the standard for communicating in different network environments.

A protocol must be bound to the network adapter card, also known as the network interface card (NIC), in order for it to be used with a network computer. In some instances, as in the case of TCP/IP or IPX/SPX, two protocols may be bound to one card. The order in which the operating system will use the protocol is determined by the order in which the protocols are bound to the NIC.

Access Methods
In a network, multiple computers are contending with each other for access to the network media. The rules for determining how a computer may send or receive data on the network is called the access method. The access method that a system uses is designed to prevent simultaneous sending of data along the cable. If two or more computers were to send data at the same time, the data may collide and be destroyed (or partially destroyed). The access method organizes the sending and receiving of data. All computers on the network need to utilize the same access method in order to be consistent in the way that the data is handled. This will ensure that a dominant access method being used by one computer doesn’t override access to the cable causing the network to fail. There are three primary access methods: • • CSMA/CD (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) or CSMA/CA (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance) Token Passing

• Demand Priority CSMA/CD (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) CSMA/CD is known as a contention method. This is because computers on the network compete with each other for the chance to transmit data on the cable. With CSMA/CD each computer on the network checks the network cable for traffic. If it “senses” (carriersense) that the cable is free, it will send data. While there is data traveling on the cable, no computer will transmit data. Occasionally, however, two computers will transmit data at the same time and the data will collide. The Collision Detection aspect of CSMA/CD causes the two computers to stop transmitting and then attempt to retransmit after a specified period of time. Naturally, the more users who are connected to a network, the denser network traffic becomes. Greater network traffic can dramatically slow down the CSMA/CD access method.

116

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards CSMA/CA (Carrier-Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance) This access method is not as popular as CSMA/CD because the sending computer will transmit its intent to transmit before sending out data. Sending out messages that it is about to transmit increases network traffic and slows down network performance. It is, however, the access method that works best with wireless connections; since the wireless channel can be verified before the data is sent. Token Passing The token passing access method is used on networks that utilize the ring topology. A token (a special type of packet) is circulated around the ring from computer to computer. If a computer needs to transmit data on the network, it must wait until it possesses the token. A computer that is waiting to transmit will take control of a free token. It will add additional header and trailer information to the token as well as the data that it wishes to transmit. Data is transmitted in frames. The header information that is added to the token includes sending and receiving addressing information. The trailer includes error control information. When the computer is ready, the token is released back out onto the network and continues around the ring until it reaches the destination computer. The destination computer grabs the token and receives the data. It then adds some data to the token indicating that it received the data and releases the token back out onto the ring. The token continues around the ring until it arrives back at the source computer. The source computer takes the token and confirms that the data it transmitted was received. It then creates a new “free” token and releases it back out on the network to be used by any computer that needs to transmit. If either the source (sending) or destination (receiving) computer detect errors in the data that was transmitted, the frame would be resent. A computer in a Token Ring network must possess a token in order to transmit. Because only one computer at a time may transmit, this is not a contention method and there are no data collisions. (Some more recent versions of the Token Ring network have the capability to pass two tokens around the ring.) Demand Priority The demand priority access method is designed for the 100 Mbps Ethernet standard 100VG-AnyLAN. It has been addressed in the IEEE 802.12 standard and is based on the hubs and end-nodes being the two components that make up a 100VG-AnyLAN network. An end node in a 100VG-AnyLAN could be a computer, router, switch, or bridge. The hub manages network traffic by searching for requests to transmit from all the nodes connected to the network. The hub is responsible for verifying that all end-nodes, addresses, and links are functioning. Demand priority is more efficient than CSMA/CD because there is only traffic between the sending computer, hub, and destination computer, instead of broadcasts over the entire network. Because of the cabling method used with this access method, (four pairs Specialized Solutions, Inc. 117

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide of wires are used, which enables quartet signaling) computers can send and receive at the same time. Contention can occur with demand priority if two computers transmit at exactly the same time, but it is possible to configure so that certain types of data receive priority when there is contention. If the hub receives two transmissions simultaneously, the one with the highest priority is serviced first. If the two transmissions have the same priority level, they are serviced at the same time by alternating between the requests.

118

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

or messages. Data is broken down into small chunks called frames or packets. but we will use the term packets. The destination computer receives the packets and reassembles them in the correct order to translate it back into the original message. Another reason for not transmitting data in such large chunks is error detection. 119 . The destination address of the receiving computer. The sending computer breaks the data into packets and adds information to each packet in order to make it possible for the receiving computer to reassemble them in the correct order. if there is a transmission error. data needs to be processed into a form that can be transmitted across a network medium. Data files tend to be quite large. Computer control data such as service requests and commands. Inc. All packets contain: • • • • • • The source address of the sending computer.) Data is converted to packets in order for it to be moved across the network medium more quickly. Also. information. Specialized Solutions. Packet Structure Packets may contain: • • • Files. Instructions for the network indicating how to transmit the data. (The terms frames and packets are often used interchangeably. The data to be transmitted.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards Network Communications (Frames and Packets) As we’ve discussed previously. Error checking information such as Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) information. Session control codes to indicate the need of a retransmission. This information allows for error checking after the data has been reassembled. Instructions that tell the receiving computer how to reassemble the data. only a small portion of the data is affected (and needs to be re-transmitted). and if they were sent out onto the network medium in this form they would overload the network cabling and slow the network dramatically.

. the computer assumes that the packets all arrived intact. Trailer The information in the trailer can vary depending upon the communication method or protocol used in a network. Data This part of the packet contains the actual data that is to be transmitted. When the packets are reassembled at the destination computer.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Packet Components Headers Headers are attached to each packet. the trailer contains the error checking information. and clocking information. The header contains information such as an alert signal to announce that a packet is being transmitted. A Packet 120 Specialized Solutions. Inc. the calculation is run again. Depending upon the network. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is a mathematical calculation that is calculated at the source computer and attached to the packet. Usually. Most files are much larger than this so many packets will be made up to complete the transmission. the CRC asks the source computer to retransmit. packets can be various sizes. the source and destination addresses. usually from 512 bytes to 4Kilobytes. If there is a discrepancy. If the results are the same.

Inc.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards Specialized Solutions. 121 .

The LLC has the ability to track acknowledgements. The original version was a 2.3 standard and is a method for computers and data systems to connect over shared cabling.3) Ethernet is a non-propriety network architecture that was originally developed at the Xerox Palo Alto Research Center (PARC) by Robert Metcalfe and David Boggs. Thicknet coaxial (10Base5). Protocols that are used with the OSI model define the rules of communication. and some are narrow gauge). Not all railroads are the same (some are electric. Ethernet uses a bus or star topology (10BaseT and 100BaseT use the star topology and 10Base2 and 10Base5 use a bus topology). . we are going to look at different standards for networks. Standards work in the Physical and Data Link layers of the OSI model. There are a number of Ethernet IEEE standards. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Standards Network standards can best be described as the physical and functional characteristic of a network. These provide the standards for the railroads.2) The Logical Link Control layer. and typically transmits at 10 Mbps. In this section. as addressed previously. Logical Link Control (802. it is the rails and switches that govern the actual movement of the trains (data). some are wide gauge. The following are the four that transmit at 10 Mbps: • • • • 10BaseT 10Base2 10Base5 10BaseFL 122 Specialized Solutions. It is probably the most popular network architecture used today. data (in this case passengers and freight) is moved in various cars. or Twisted Pair cable (10BaseT and 100BaseT). like NetBIOS (Windows) or NetWare (Novell). some are diesel. It is a baseband system and utilizes the CSMA/CD access method. but its primary function is maintaining the network link by identifying a line protocol. but all railroads that are built to the same standards can exchange cars (data).94 Mbps network system that would connect over 100 computers on a one-kilometer cable. For example. However. It can be installed with Thinnet coaxial (10Base2). There are rules or protocols that govern how the cars are loaded and the origination and destination points. Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802. is one of two sublayers of the Data-Link layer and is concerned with managing traffic over the physical medium. in a railroad. Ethernet (802. The standards define the means of communications.

5 meters. and the maximum number of segments is 5 with 3 being populated. It transmits at 10 Mbps using baseband technology. The maximum number of nodes per network 90. (There may be five segments but only three may be populated. is 185 meters.5 meters. 10BaseT has a maximum segment length of 100 meters (Twisted Pair wiring maximum segment length) and it is connected using RJ-45 connectors. The maximum number of nodes per network 100. The maximum number of segments containing nodes per network is 3. meaning 10Base5 has a maximum segment length of 500 meters. 100 Mbps IEEE Ethernet Standards The IEEE committee has introduced new specifications for 100 Mbps Ethernet standards that can meet the demands of today’s high-bandwidth applications. 123 . BNC connectors and a transceiver. The maximum number of nodes per network is 1024 and the minimum distance between nodes is 2. These applications include video. It transmits at 10 Mbps using baseband technology in a bus topology.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards 10BaseT (Twisted Pair) The “10” in 10BaseT indicates that it transmits at 10 Mbps.) This is referred to as the “5-4-3 Rule”. 10Base5 (Thicknet) 10Base5 uses Thicknet (coaxial) cable. repeaters can be used for longer distances. it transmits at 10 Mbps using baseband technology. As its name implies. The actual maximum segment length. 10Base2 (Thinnet) 10Base2 uses Thinnet (coaxial) cable with BNC connectors in a Bus topology. The maximum segment length for 10BaseFL is 2000 meters. to name a few. The “2” stands for 2 times 100 meters. however. The “5” stands for 5 times 100 meters. If the segment must exceed this limitation. The maximum number of nodes per segment is 30. The main use for this specification is for long cable runs. The “Base” indicates that it uses Baseband technology (single channel).5 meters. The two Ethernet standards for 100 Mbps are: • 100BaseVG-AnyLAN Ethernet Specialized Solutions. indicating its maximum segment length. While 10BaseT can and does work with STP cabling. The minimum distance between nodes is . 10BaseT uses the star topology. Inc. 10BaseFL (Fiber Optic) 10BaseFL is the specification for running Ethernet over fiber-optic cable. it is most commonly created with UTP cable. The maximum number of nodes per segment is 100 in a 10Base5 system. document and image storage. and computer aided design. The minimum distance between nodes is 2. And the “T” indicates that it uses Twisted Pair cabling.

and provides a data rate of 1 billion bits per second (one gigabit). It can support the demand priority access method as well as an option for filtering address frames at the hub for added privacy. VG. Gigabit Ethernet is currently being used as the backbone in many larger networks. using the CSMA/CD access method. although copper can be used with much shorter distances. Gigabit Ethernet Gigabit Ethernet is a transmission technology based on the Ethernet frame format and protocol used in local area networks (LANs). the 100 means that it transmits at 100 Mbps and the Base means it uses baseband technology. The IEEE specification 802. 100BaseVG requires its own hub and cards. with Gigabit Ethernet. to some degree. (It can be extended longer but it requires special equipment. Because of its intense speed. It uses Category 5 twisted pair cable or fiber-optic cable in a Star Bus topology. The T4 means that it uses four-pair twisted pair cable. It is basically a way of transmitting Ethernet frames and Token Ring packets.12 is the standard that defines this technology.) 100BaseX (“Fast Ethernet”) Fast Ethernet (as 100BaseX is sometimes called) is simply an extension to the existing Ethernet 10Base Ethernet standard. the TX means it uses two-pair twisted pair cable. but that will be referred to later in this book. Gigabit Ethernet is carried primarily on fiber optic cable. 10-Gigabit Ethernet is also on the horizon. This uses a star topology over fiber-optic and Category 4 and 5 twisted pair cable at a data transmission rate of 100 Mbps.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide • 100BaseX Ethernet (Fast Ethernet) 100VG-AnyLAN In 100VG-AnyLAN the VG stands for Voice Grade. and the FX means fiber-optic cable is used. 124 Specialized Solutions. It is known by at least four names: 100VG-AnyLAN. Inc. 100BaseVG. There are three different specifications: 100BaseT4 (this uses UTP four-pair Category 5) 100BaseTX (this uses UTP or STP two-pair Category 5) 100BaseFX (this uses two-strand fiber-optic) As you know. ATM competes. . they are referring to the same thing. and AnyLAN. When you see any of these terms. and the longest cable length is 250 meters.

Specialized Solutions. 125 .Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards Other Ethernet Considerations Many communication protocols are compatible with Ethernet including TCP/IP. Ethernet also works in the UNIX environment. It is also compatible with operating systems such as: • • • • • • • • • Microsoft Windows 2000 Microsoft Windows NT Server Microsoft Windows NT Workstation Microsoft Windows 95 and Windows 98 Microsoft Windows for Workgroups Microsoft LAN Manager IBM LAN Server AppleShare Novell NetWare Ethernet networks may be segmented in order to improve performance. Inc. by joining with either a router or a bridge.

126 Specialized Solutions. primarily in IBM mini and mainframe systems. Actually. The computer that wants to transmit takes possession of the token. but is still used today. How it Works Basically. IBM introduced Token Ring around 1984. The physical ring is in the hub and the logical ring represents the data’s path between the nodes. While the token is in use by a computer to send data. it uses the baseband technology. The token is actually a stream of data that allows a computer to transmit data on the cable. The data frame is a different type of frame than the token. This token will travel around the ring until a computer signals that it needs to send data. Access Control This sets the frame priority and is also where it is encoded to let the network computers know whether the frame is a token or a data frame. 2. the network creates a token when the first computer comes online. This is so that no other network computer will try to possess it to transmit data. Frame Control The information here determines whether the frame is being transmitted to all computers on the network or one specific “end station” computer. A computer cannot transmit data in a Token Ring environment unless it possesses the token. it is a star ring with each node connected to a central hub. It is not as popular as Ethernet. Like Ethernet. The Token Ring access method. is what sets Token Ring apart.5) The Token Ring architecture is defined in the IEEE 802. Destination Address This is the address of the receiving computer. Each computer on the network acts as a repeater and regenerates the signal as the token/data frame passes through it. Data collisions are avoided because only one computer is transmitting at a time and no other computer is allowed to transmit unless it possesses the token (which won’t be released until the previous computer is finished). and 3). more than the cable design. Inc. The cable used is STP and UTP (IBM types 1.5 standard. and it has a transmission speed of 4 or 16 Mbps. The sending computer encodes the data frame with information such as: Start Delimiter This marks the start of the frame.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Token Ring (802. it is known as a data frame. . The name Token Ring implies that the physical layout is that of a ring.

This computer.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards Source Address This is the address of the sending computer. It then encodes the frame with information indicating that it received the data and there were no errors detected. it will notify the monitor that it didn’t receive an expected signal. The beacon is passed from node to node around the ring. If a computer doesn’t receive a beacon when expected. called the active monitor. Beaconing In a Token Ring environment. Message This is the data or file to be transmitted. The receiving computer copies the data into its buffer.5 standards say it travels clockwise. has the responsibility of making sure that frames are being sent and received accurately. while IBM says counter-clockwise. the sending computer releases it out onto the network where it travels around the ring until it reaches the destination address. Every seven seconds the active monitor will send out a beacon. The frame is then released back out onto the cable where it travels back to the sending computer. as well as its own address. Or. the active monitor performs a process known as beaconing. Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) This is information for error detection. Note: Data travels in only one direction on a Token Ring network. . After encoding the data frame. As each new computer comes online. This signal contains the address of its upstream neighbor. The network will then attempt to diagnose and repair the problem without disrupting the entire network. To accomplish this task. it would indicate that the data needed to be retransmitted. the first computer to come online is assigned to monitor network activity. the Token Ring network initializes it so that it may join the ring. Inc. if there were errors. Assuming that the frame acknowledges that the transmission was successful. Its address is checked to confirm that there are no duplicate addresses on the network and the other computers on the ring are notified of the new computer’s active status. the old frame is removed and the computer creates a new token and releases it back out onto the ring. 127 Specialized Solutions. Whether it travels clockwise or counter-clockwise is a matter of convention. The IEEE 802. The active monitor investigates any frames that have traveled the ring more than once and ensures that only one token is traveling the ring at any one time.

Token Ring Patch Cables IBM Type 6 cable is used for patch cables in a Token Ring network. The Type 128 Specialized Solutions. such as: • • • MAU (Multistation Access Unit) MSAU (Multistation Access Unit) SMAU (Smart Multistation Access Unit) A Token Ring network can be expanded to have as many as 33 hubs. the failure of one computer will bring down the rest of the network. MAUs can sense when one of the connected computers fails. There is some contention as to the maximum distance from the computer to the hub using Type 3 cable.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Multistation Access Unit (The Hub) The actual ring in a Token Ring network is in the hub. but some vendors state that it is as much as 152 meters. This hub is known by a few names. Most Token Ring networks use IBM Type 3 UTP cabling. the internal ring converts to an external ring at each connection point. each ring can connect up to 72 computers. Instead the connectors can be flipped over to connect to one another. the maximum distance from the computer to the hub is 100 meters. Inc. This is known as a hermaphroditic connector. Token Ring Cabling STP or UTP is used to connect each node to the hub. Type 3 cable is connected with RJ-45 (8-pin) connectors if using four-pair or RJ-11 (4-pin) if using two-pair. Token Ring Connectors Token Ring networks use MIC (Media Interface Connectors) connectors for Type 1 and Type 2 cable. Type 1 has a maximum distance from the computer to the hub of 101 meters. The minimum distance using either STP or UTP is 2. it is only about 45 meters. Each node is connected to the hub via a cable. The maximum distance between two MAUs is 152 meters. but types 1 and 2 may also be used. Using the RJ connectors allows for one cable run to connect both data and telephone equipment. The faulty node is then disconnected from the ring so as not to affect the rest of the network. When a computer is connected.5 meters. IBM states that it is only 46 meters. each ring can connect up to 260 computers. Using STP. These patch cables extend the connection between the computer and the hub or between two hubs. Media filters convert cable connectors between the adapter card and the telephone jack (RJ-45/RJ-11) and reduce line noise. In a pure token passing environment. just as in other networks that use a hub. Using UTP. as there are no male and female ends. Using UTP. Using STP. .

Specialized Solutions.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards 6 cable has a maximum distance of 46 meters between the computer and the hub. thereby decreasing the number of transmissions needed for data transfers. hubs may be up to 730 meters apart with Type 1 or Type 2 cable and up to 365 meters apart using Type 3 cable. Patch panels are used to organize patch cables. Token ring networks are well suited to fiber-optic cable. it is still an environment that you may be dealing with as a networking professional. Token Ring Fiber-Optic Using fiber-optic cabling in a Token Ring network can increase the range up to ten times that of copper. care must be taken that all cards on the network are compatible. Therefore. Although it is not nearly as popular as the Ethernet or Token Ring architectures. Inc. Token ring cable lengths may be increased by using repeaters. All cards on the network need to be set at the same speed. therefore network capabilities are built into all Macintosh computers. A 16 Mbps card can slow to 4 Mbps. but a 4 Mbps card cannot speed up to 16 Mbps. Token Ring Repeaters Just as in other network environments. The 16 Mbps card allows for a larger frame length. AppleTalk AppleTalk is the network architecture used in a Macintosh environment. AppleTalk is included with the Macintosh operating system software. Type 6 may also be used to increase the length of Type 3 cable or for connecting computers directly to the hub. Using a pair of repeaters. 129 . Token Ring Adapter Cards A Token Ring has two transmission speeds: 4 Mbps and 16 Mbps.

EtherTalk EtherTalk is simply a way to run AppleTalk on coaxial cable using an EtherTalk NB NIC.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide AppleTalk networks are usually called LocalTalk. and even some UNIX computers. The client software for AppleShare is also included in the Apple operating system. When a computer goes online in a LocalTalk network. It will then broadcast the chosen address to determine if any other computer online is using the address. AppleShare also provides a print server. Inc. 130 Specialized Solutions. Since Macintosh builds-in the hardware for LocalTalk in every computer. LocalTalk LocalTalk uses STP. the device assigns itself an address. This is useful for expanding the LocalTalk network or for relieving traffic on a larger network. by using zones. If it is not being used by another computer. This address is chosen at random from a range of available addresses. The TokenTalk NB card is used to attach to a Token Ring network. AppleTalk can be used by non-Macintosh computers such as IBM compatible computers. mainframe computers. A zone is a named Subnetwork that users may access simply by selecting it. LocalTalk performance is rather limited. TokenTalk TokenTalk is simply a way to run AppleTalk in a Token Ring (IEEE 802. Zones LocalTalk networks may be joined together using zones. It uses the CSMA/CD access method and can connect a maximum of 32 devices. UTP. it is very inexpensive to initiate. AppleShare The file server on an AppleTalk network is called AppleShare. it will store it to use each time it goes online. or Fiber-Optic cable in a Bus topology. . Apple has always been open to third-party development. EtherTalk may be implemented on Thinnet or Thicknet coaxial cable.5 Standard) environment. AppleTalk can incorporate other types of networks such as Token Rings. Digital Equipment Corporation’s VAX™ computers. As such. so it is not used as often as Ethernet or Token Ring.

Specialized Solutions. ARCNet was developed before the IEEE 802 specifications.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards ARCNet ( Attached Resource Computer Network) In 1977 Datapoint Corporation developed the ARCNet technology. Inc. called ARCNet Plus. ARCNet utilizes hubs. the source address and up to 508 bytes of data. Instead of the token traveling around a ring. a token is needed in order for a computer to transmit data. but is normally installed using RG-62 A/U coaxial cable. the token is passed in numerical order. with coaxial cable and BNC connectors. If using either the Star or Bus topology with UTP and RJ-45 or RJ-11 connectors. It uses a token-passing access method that transmits at 2. the maximum cable distance between the computer and the hub is 610 meters. Just like other token-passing access method architectures. 131 . If computer #1 is at one end of the network and Computer #2 is at the other. or smart. active. The ARCNet Plus architecture can hold up to 4096 bytes of data. the token still passes in numerical order. this can really slow a network down if the computers are not in order.4 standards (Token Bus LAN). A later version. This distance drops to only 305 meters if using the Bus topology. ARCNet transmits data in packets.5 Mbps. It is a simple and inexpensive network architecture that may use a Bus or Star Bus topology. These packets contain the destination address. the maximum cable distance is 244 meters. ARCNet can use twisted-pair or fiber-optic cabling. These hubs may be passive. has a data transmission rate of 20 Mbps. Obviously. but it can be adequately charted to the 802. If using an active hub in a Star topology.

11 is the latest generation of enterprise-class wireless LAN technology. Wireless technology is discussed in further detail in chapter four. generally). Inc. 132 Specialized Solutions.11) IEEE 802. . The capacity to use wireless technology is there for large-scale deployments as well. Speeds up to 54 Mbps will be available within wireless networks (LANs to be more specific).Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Wireless (802. Interference can be lessened by their ability to function in their own band (in the GHz range.

Managing network data is all about traffic control. etc. the source and destination addresses. It is extremely important that you understand the different cabling schemes and their connectors as well as the maximum segment lengths for all of these different architectures. The 100 Mbps and Gigabit Ethernet architectures will be even more prevalent in the future. and the access method (such as CSMA/CD. destination address and the actual data that is being transmitted. and clocking information.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards Summary This has been another information intensive chapter and we covered a lot of information on the different networking architectures. Packets will include information to identify the source address. Most packets also include error checking or CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) methods to check the reliability of the packets received. Be sure to complete the following exercises and review questions. which includes an alert signal that a computer is transmitting. Token Passing and Demand Priority) is the governor of how traffic is controlled on a network. 10Base5. The popular Ethernet architecture is defined in the IEEE 802. and 10BaseT. AppleTalk and ARCNet architectures may be used less than Ethernet or Token Ring. If it were sent out in one continuous stream it would quickly bring network traffic to a halt due to the large size of the data. Be sure that you understand how this architecture works. go back and review the chapter again. If you are having trouble with any of these concepts. which is where the error checking calculation is located. CSMA/CA. Therefore. 133 . the Data. as well as the different cabling schemes and cable distances. It is important that you understand their specifications and access methods as well. it is still a common architecture and is said to be increasing its market share by as much as 20% per year. Packets consist of three components: the Header. Specialized Solutions. As a networking professional you will encounter this type of network most often. Inc. It is important for the networking professional to understand the characteristics of each access method. Although Token Ring is not as popular as Ethernet. but as a networking professional you will encounter them.3 standards. Data is sent out on the network in smaller chunks of data called packets (or frames). it is important that you are knowledgeable about the different types of Ethernet such as 10Base2. and the Trailer.

Keyword Access Method AppleShare AppleTalk ARCNet Beaconing CRC CSMA/CA CSMA/CD Demand Priority Ethernet EtherTalk Frames Header Hub LocalTalk Multistation Access Unit Packets Patch Cable Smart Multistation Access Unit Token Passing Definition 134 Specialized Solutions. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. .

Inc.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards Keyword Token Ring TokenTalk Trailer Zones Definition Specialized Solutions. 135 .

What sort of information do packet headers contain? 9.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 5 1. What does the “T” in 10BaseT indicate? 10. What happens if two computers using the demand priority access method transmit at exactly the same time? 6. What are the three primary access methods? 2. Why isn’t token passing considered a contention method? 4. Describe how data is transmitted in the Token Ring architecture. CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA. Describe the difference between the two different contention methods. What is CRC and what part of the packet is it usually located in? 8. 3. 5. What type of cable is used in 10BaseFL? 136 Specialized Solutions. What type of connectors are used in 10Base5? 12. . What is the maximum segment length in 10Base2? 11. Inc. How is data transmitted over the network cable? 7.

What are the two transmission speeds of Token Ring? 17. What is the purpose of AppleShare? 24. Which IEEE Specification defines Ethernet? 15. Describe beaconing as it applies to Token Ring architecture. How are data collisions avoided in the Token Ring architecture? 18. 19.Chapter 5 – Network Protocols & Standards 13. Inc. What is a SMAU? 21. How does a computer on a LocalTalk network obtain its address? 23. Describe a MIC connector. Which way does data travel in a Token Ring network? 20. 22. 14. How does data flow in an ARCNet network? Specialized Solutions. Name the two main 100 Mbps Ethernet Standards. 137 . Which IEEE Specification defines Token Ring? 16. What type of access method does an ARCNet network utilize? 25.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 138 Specialized Solutions. Inc. .

You could design the best high-speed low-cost Windows system that was ever imagined. whoever is assigned the upgrade project will be forever indebted to you. etc? If. you will have a lot of knowledge and expertise with networks. Most importantly. for example. Starting a Network Project A unique opportunity for any network professional is to design a network from beginning to end. The size of the company and the portion of the network affected. The product – this is very important as a graphic arts client will have different needs than an engineering firm or a law office. you need to approach the project as if it were for someone else. pay attention to details. address. The place to start a new network is with a pad of paper and a pencil or two. you are not designing for yourself.Chapter 6 – Network Design Chapter 6 – Network Design In this chapter we are going to put to use many of the terms and concepts that we studied in earlier chapters of this training guide. who has them. rather than a client’s. However. are there any printers or scanners. how they are installed and how to troubleshoot them. (demographics). Even if this network is your own. and goals. 139 . Then we will study in more detail network adapter cards. Hardware compatibility is a major consideration in network design and is often the source of troubles when expanding or upgrading networks. The Customer Obtaining a clear understanding of your customer and their needs is essential when designing a network. The customer’s likes. but if your customer is a Macintosh user. dislikes. We will start by looking at what it takes to layout a network from scratch. you certainly don’t want to design a network around Windows. The following is some suggested information that you should gather about your customer: The basics – name. The facility – how big is the building(s) and what is the layout of the various offices? Current level of technology – how many computers do they have. There are two things that you will need to know. Inc. (If not. Finally. This is well and good if you are designing a network for your own use. this is a Macintosh-based company. This will give you the discipline to ask yourself the right questions and to begin the process of documentation. As a network professional. Specialized Solutions. we will consider hardware compatibility. This is especially true if you will be maintaining or upgrading this network in the future. For most of us this will be a rare event since most companies already have a network and are working with expanding or increasing the performance of what they already have. The most important aspect of creating a new network is to document everything that you do. etc. in many cases. your design will not work for them.

This can be a simple program like Microsoft Paint. Is an Internet connection needed now or in the future? Will it be for all users or just a select few? What additional services will the network need to provide? Sharing of resources. if the file is compressed. With this information in hand. A good intermediate program is Visio 2002. or as complex and as expensive as AutoCAD.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide The Network Goals In addition to the customer’s needs. at this time. only documenting the facility and the requirements of the network. The following are some questions to consider: Will this be a simple LAN or a complex WAN with Internet and remote users? What are the future needs? Is this network to start small and expand later. Once you collect this information. Your document should include a summary of all the information you collected. etc. This program provides simple templates for both facilities and network components. you must get a clear definition of goals of the network. Inc. you are now ready to begin the designing of the network. or will it meet the requirements of the latest technology? How much traffic do you anticipate now and in the future? A business office moving 1000 documents and spreadsheets across a network will generate far less traffic than a graphic arts or engineering office moving 1000 large imaging files. print services. you are not documenting your network. You will need this information as you make decisions in the next few steps. Remember. . You may want to consider using a drawing program to create a layout of the facility. files services. So. a textonly MS Word file will be approximately 30 KB of data while a single page image file will average 50 KB. the same 1000 documents could be as little as 30 MB. There are many intermediate drawing packages that are available. For example. 140 Specialized Solutions. This can be done using any word processor or spreadsheet program. or as much as 8 MB for the same image scanned (black and white) at 300 dpi uncompressed (even more if color or grayscale). or as large as 8 GB. prepare a design document.

Chapter 6 – Network Design Specialized Solutions. 141 . Inc.

This means that every 142 Specialized Solutions. Skill level of the network users. Are they committed to the change or are they going to resist the change? When to Choose Peer-to-Peer There are many reasons why you would want to choose peer-to-peer. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Determine Network Type Once you collect all the information described above. They can provide services to the network and use services provided by others. You may need to install the software. The number of nodes (computers and other resources) on the network. As long as you have the original software disk (CD). The following lists the information that you will need in order to choose your network type. Also. may cause problems in the future. The most prominent are simplicity and cost. you will need to start making some decisions. The level of security required. as generally it is not installed during a standard installation. For example. you will have no problem. but most operating systems like Windows 95 and up and Macintosh OS X are “network ready. The decision that you make at this time will have an affect on the hardware and software choices that you make in the future. if you have a printer connected to your computer. In a peer-to-peer network. Peerto-peer networks do provide some security in the form of allowing you to select what you want to share to the network. if a colleague has a color printer and you don’t. Are they able to handle a sophisticated network or must the network be transparent to them? The available budget (both now and in the future). Most personal computers today will have more than enough power to successfully operate in a peer-to-peer environment. The disadvantages of peer-to-peer networks are security and limited network size. This can range from none to very high. all computers are equal. you can send work to it if you need color printing (assuming that they share the printer to the network). The first is the type of network you will be designing. This sharing is on a directory level. . The type of business and how that will affect network traffic. Peer-to-peer networks are economical to setup and implement. not all nodes may need the same level of security. they include the necessary software and protocols for file and print sharing. they do not require a high-power computer with lots of speed and processing power. If you do not have this information go back and get it.” That is. The wrong choice now. You may have to add network cards and cabling. First. you can share it to the network and anyone who has access to the network can send work to it. Keep in mind that you may not be able to mix two different operating systems without additional software or upgrading to a client/server network. You will need to take careful consideration of the information collected in the first step to assist you with this decision. The commitment of management and users. Likewise. Here you will have two choices: peer-to-peer or client/server.

and expand as your needs expand. you will also need to consider the disadvantages. Also. 24-hours per day. instead of backing up individual workstations. In a peer-to-peer situation. The result will be a slow-down of performance on your workstation. While there are many advantages. This centralized file system also makes for easy transfers of files throughout the company. the general rule is that peer-to-peer networks should be limited to about 10 workstations. only a network administrator can create a user name and assign permissions to that user. the performance of the network will be better than in a peer-to-peer network. have high-power processor. Using a file server to maintain all of the company-wide files. This will be especially true if your workstation is using an older. administration can be a Specialized Solutions. any user can log on to a workstation (with a new name and password) and gain access to the network.Chapter 6 – Network Design file in the directory will be available to the network. Last but not least. etc. This means that you can start small with one server and a few workstations. must less the workings of a network. Remember. information can be made available to them through a RAS (Remote Access Server) connection. the more knowledgeable the administrator needs to be. When to Choose Client/Server On a client/server network (also known as server-based networks). a peer-to-peer network may be the perfect solution. As for size. This means that one or more computers are designated as servers and provide the resources for the entire network. Another advantage of server-based networks is that the servers are never turned off. Also. You can connect more workstations. they will also be using your processor to do their printing. and lots of memory. but what is often overlooked is the cost to administer the network. Before you can use any resource. The most prominent disadvantage is the cost to install and operate the network. this will take part of their normal workday will be taken up to react to any problems and maintain existing accounts. if employees need remote access. you must have both the authorization to use the network and permission to use the resource. but there will most likely be reductions in network performance as stations are added. the network must operate transparent to them. For these people. In small networks. In a strict peer-topeer network. In a small network where everybody knows each other and security is not an issue. Perhaps the most significant aspect of using server-based networks is security. if anyone is using a resource on your workstation. you will not need to worry if Mary is on vacation and her computer is turned off (since she is the only one in the company that has a color printer). all that is needed is one or two knowledgeable people to act as administrators. is another advantage of a server-based network. Inc. such as your printer. all network resources are usually centralized. server-based networks are scaleable. In large networks. The more sophisticated the network. Most employees have little or no knowledge of the workings of computers. a client with a limited budget may consider this type of network as a starting point or entry-level network. These server-based networks provide a central database that manages access to all the resources as well as the network itself. It is obvious that server-based networks will require better and higher-powered hardware. In a server-based network. Since these computers are larger. 143 . slower processor and/or has limited memory (RAM). This means that if you need to use the color printer that is connected to the print server.

with open access to the global community.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide full-time job for one or more people and may even require the skills of a certified network professional.0 255.0. For this reason. Once you have made this decision.0 144 Specialized Solutions.255.0.0. present each case to the client and let them make the final decision. The only problem is that if your firewall were to come down. Prepare a case (on paper) of the pros and cons of each. When you are sitting on the fence. This decision will be the basis for the rest of your network design. which would limit its access to those outside of the company. A private network would be a corporate network or an Intranet. let us define the difference between the terms public and private network.192. If all else fails. Actually.255 255.255. the answer will be very obvious. If you are not sure you have enough information. In some cases. it is highly recommended that you use these addresses for your private addressing. Public and Private networks In addition. there are specific addresses that are filtered by the routers at the backbone of the Internet.0.0. you can use any address that you want to use inside of your own network and behind your firewalls. in others it could go either way.0.0 -10. For this reason. Inc.255.0 .32. The use of these addresses will completely prevent the address conflict issue.0.0 255. stick with it and move forward.255 172.0 -172. since your organization will more than likely need access to the Internet and networks outside of their LAN. Making the Choice Making that final decision is often difficult. Each network operating system supplier has their own certification program such as Microsoft’s MCSE (Microsoft Certified System Engineer) and Novell’s CNE (Certified Novell Engineer). be sure to follow a disciplined procedure: Collect all your information.255.255. then you might have an address conflict with another entity on the Internet.0 192. .168.168.16. get more. A public network would be the Internet.0. 10.255.

145 . Inc.Chapter 6 – Network Design Specialized Solutions.

On the other hand. Remember. if you are creating a new network and have no inventory to work with. you must add new hardware. Use it as a starting place to build your own. if all or part of a network already exists. use this sheet to define your proposed new equipment. don’t just simply ask someone what he or she has. this is a detailed inventory that requires someone that is knowledgeable in computers and networks. you can skip this section. The best approach is to make an inventory sheet for each piece of equipment. You may also want to take an inventory as part of your initial evaluation. The following page shows an example of what an inventory sheet might look like.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Define the Starting Place If you are designing a network from the ground up and literally starting with a blank piece of paper. When taking this inventory. The following is an example of an inventory sheet. . 146 Specialized Solutions. This form should identify the equipment and its specifications. Feel free to use this as a starting place for developing your own customized form. Inc. That person is you! Be sure to take a small toolkit and a flashlight with you. ask him or her to show you. The documenting of existing equipment includes two components: hardware and software. you will need to make a detailed inventory of the materials you already have. Also. whether hardware or software. Some of the information you need may be inside the machine and you will have to remove a case or two.

PCI. 147 . Inc.Chapter 6 – Network Design Network Equipment Inventory Sheet Item Number: ___________ Type of Equipment: Computer Printer Telecommunication Other If Other: _______________________________________ Location: Identification: Make: Model: Serial #: ____________________________ ____________________________ _____________________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ Computer: Processor (Type and Speed) RAM Hard Drive(s) Monitor Video Card Modem Connected Peripherals Bus Type (ISA. etc.) # of Free Slots Network Card Printer: Installed RAM Interface (Parallel or SCSI) Network Compliant (Yes/No) Peripheral: Type of Device Interface (Parallel or SCSI) Specialized Solutions.

Software: If this device uses software. 148 Specialized Solutions. .Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Telecommunication: Describe the device and its function. Name of Program:(Operating System) __________________ Version Number: Licensing Information: ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ Original Disk (CD) Available: ____________________ Name of Program: Version Number: Licensing Information: ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ Original Disk (CD) Available: ____________________ Name of Program: Version Number: Licensing Information: ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ ____________________ Original Disk (CD) Available: ____________________ Use additional paper if necessary. Inc. describe each program.

Chapter 6 – Network Design Specialized Solutions. 149 . Inc.

it will make future documentation easier. and collect all of the documentation you have been working on. A Network Layout 150 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Design the Network At last we should have enough information to start designing our network. or the software drawing program that you used to create the layout of the facility. Inc. By assigning them a number now. Using the inventory sheets and the objectives of the network. It is time to get out that pencil and paper. . make a drawing of the facility and each network node. Start with the location of existing equipment (if any) then draw the location of the new equipment. This might be a good time to start identifying each node with a name and number.

For example. if you are not sure if expansion is in your future.Chapter 6 – Network Design Media Selection Media selection is an aspect of installing a network that should not be taken lightly. 151 . These cables are inexpensive and if all computers are in the same proximity. It will cost a lot more to upgrade later. the cost of CAT 5 is not significantly more than CAT 3. If economics are a major concern and you are designing a small temporary LAN. it would be worthwhile to spend a little more now and install CAT 5e or CAT 6 than to replace it in 2 to 3 years. In most environments this will be no problem. may require that you install plenum grade cables for part or all of your installation. It may be more cost effective to purchase a large quantity of plenum grade rather than a mix of plenum and standard grade. Realistically. Cable Type – If your goal is to save money now and you don’t need a high-speed network. The following are several other factors that must be considered before making your final choice: Topology – If you use a physical star topology. you must comply with requirements of the 5-4-3 rule for number of segments. In addition. and the run from the server room to the maintenance shop is 400 meters (1312 feet). On the high end. you will need to remember that all cables must originate from the hub. you might consider CAT 3. Cable Grade – Local fire codes. The 100 Mbps speed of this media will handle this workload without problems. However. (up to 2 kilometers – 6562 feet) choose fiber optics. a small network with only a few workstations sharing files and printing will probably work fine with CAT 5 UTP cables. It is the most labor-intensive of all the processes and the most costly to replace. such as in an imaging environment. you will need to install CAT 5e or CAT 6 UTP to be able to take advantage of its 1000 Mbps speed. The most important aspect of media selection is to be sure that the media you choose will meet the performance criteria of the network. However. Cable lengths must be considered. repeaters and nodes. Therefore. CAT 6 is the UTP of choice. hub location is critical for determining cable lengths. a simple bus topology with each computer in a series will save on the budget (don’t forget to terminate each end). If you intend to use UTP or STP cables. for long term use and eventual upgrade to 100 MHz. 5-4-3 – If your installation is coaxial Ethernet. where money is no object and security is critical or you have long distances to cover. if you are going to have hundreds of computers or transfer large quantities of large files. you will need Thicknet coaxial cables. or hub to computer) does not exceed 100 meters (328 feet). or just good common sense. Specialized Solutions. you must make sure that the longest connection (computer to computer. Inc. but if this is a large facility. consider Thinnet coaxial cable.

Less than ideal conditions will also decrease the life expectancy of your equipment. if you intend to work with a larger network or WAN. it may not be prudent to recommend the change to Windows 2000/2003. However. Most network operating systems today are robust and will operate transparent to the users. you may need to install fiber optics at least in that area. Most larger companies will have a dedicated room for their server (the Server room). which is kept at the ideal temperature for the equipment. The equipment should be shielded from ESD. it doesn’t really matter. EMI. which can generate damaging ESD. . are usually what is found in the office environment where most networks are installed. which can cause corrosion. the same conditions that are good for people are often ideal for computers. they are sensitive to temperature changes. low-humidity. can all cause a computer to fail or behave erratically. since they don’t use electricity to transmit a signal. Fiber optics are also a good alternative when the manufacturing environment cannot allow for any possibility of even a small spark. Environment – If all or part of the network is in a hostile environment (corrosive manufacturing) you should consider alternatives like fiber optics. These routable protocols are more difficult to configure. If the customer has always used Novell NetWare and is satisfied with the performance. but it is important that the room be well ventilated and climate controlled. with a relative humidity of 30 percent. It is not strictly necessary to have a dedicated room for the equipment. Fortunately. or uses lots of electrical or electronic equipment that generates EMI (electromagnetic interference) or RFI (Radio Frequency Interference). The non-routable protocols. and should have a method to ensure that clean power is available. The next choice is whether to use a routable or non-routable protocol. such as NetBEUI are simple and work well with peer-to-peer networks and small LANs. On the other hand. you need a routable protocol such as TCP/IP. such as a surge suppressor and an uninterruptible power supply. Protocol Selection The most important issue with selecting a protocol is to use the same protocol throughout the network. and fluctuating line-voltages from the incoming power source. Therefore. Like us. it will work. which requires the use of routers. on the surface. and RFI. NOS Selection Choosing the network operating system is a matter of user preference. sometimes the customer will make the choice for you. Variable temperatures. Constant temperatures of around 70° F. but are not limited. As long as it is configured well and meets the needs of the customer.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Noise – If all or part of the installation is located in an industrial environment (vibration and noise). Inc. Environmental Concerns A major concern that is often overlooked when designing a network is the actual environment in which the computers will be operating. high-humidity. and this is also the ultimate atmosphere for a computer. 152 Specialized Solutions.

Inc. 153 .Chapter 6 – Network Design Specialized Solutions.

it will be a wall plate with an RJ-45 outlet. These outlets will make for a nice and neat installation and will make the room ready to connect a computer to the network. This is just a strip of RG-45 connectors.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Putting it all together Installing the media is a task that is often best left to someone who specializes in cable installation. To keep these organized. . Cable to Computer Depending on the selection of cable. the cables are connected to a patch panel. Connecting to a computer Cable to Hub The connection of the cables to the hub will usually take place in the “server room. So let’s assume that you or your specialist has run all the cables. you will most likely need to install a wall outlet. The hub will know that the cable is not connected and will simply ignore it. if using CAT 5 or CAT 6. This way.” This is a centrally located room or closet that will house the primary server and hub. One advantage of using CAT 5 or CAT 6 cable in a star topology from a hub. Each cable is in turn connected to one of the outlets and a patch cable is then used to connect it to the hub. you can install future or optional locations in preparation for expanding. is that you do not have to install a computer on every outlet. The next step will be a patch cable that runs between the network adapter card and the outlet. There are a few more components that need to be installed. All the cables will be brought to one location. In most cases. 154 Specialized Solutions. Inc. One thing to remember about these patch cables is that their length must be considered as part of the overall length of the cable. Make sure that either you or the specialist marks each cable at both ends. The type of outlet will depend on the type of cable. This way you can identify each location.

Chapter 6 – Network Design Connecting to a Hub Network Adapter Cards Installing the cabling for a network is literally installing the Physical layer of the network. Inc. That part is the network adapter card. Because it must connect to both the computer and the media. there are three things to consider: • • • Network Compatibility Media Compatibility Computer Compatibility Connecting to a NIC Specialized Solutions. there is one more part of the Physical layer that must be installed. 155 . Actually. Therefore you must know the requirements of each. we must select a card that is compatible with both. Once that is done. This card is a circuit board with all the electronic circuitry and components necessary to physically connect to the computer and the media.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 156 Specialized Solutions. . Inc.

Inc. a Specialized Solutions.Chapter 6 – Network Design Network and Hardware Compatibility Network compatibility is a key consideration in network design. you will have to know the type of expansion slots used in the computer and whether or not there are any free slots. Micro Channel. There are four types of cards that you will encounter (ISA. In addition to being compatible with the network. This section will look at compatibility issues. Network cards are designed to meet the standards of the bus. Also. the number of connectors. Building across-theboard compatibility for hardware and software at the design stage will simplify future maintenance and troubleshooting. 157 . Therefore. a 10 Mbps card (10BaseT) will work on a 100 Mbps network (100BaseTX). which can be a useful tool. The actual connection between the card and the bus is called an expansion slot because of the way the cards are installed. Adapter Card Compatibility A network card acts as the interface between the computer and the network. there are compatibility issues on both sides of the interface. The best way to find out is to remove the case and look. For example. and therefore the speed at which data can be moved. These are little LEDs (one. If you are installing a Token Ring network. The adapter card (NIC) must be able to communicate on the network using the same standards and protocols as the other components. but only at 10 Mbps. but in the long run this will add significantly to the cost and time requirements of maintenance. Not all cards are the same. This bus is a group of parallel conductors that carry digital information to and from the CPU to all parts of the computer. also called PC Cards. Depending on the vintage of the computer. The different types of cards are designated by the orientation and number of these connections. Laptops generally use PCMCIA cards. will change. Making incompatible components work together is possible in most instances. Card to Network Network adapter card compatibility is simple. administration. In general. you must have Token Ring cards. the speed of the card is important. the card must be compatible with the computer. EISA. but requires some knowledge of the inside workings of a computer. Note: Laptops and proprietary computers will have special cards designed to fit their architecture. two. and expansion projects. but only at 10 Mbps. The processor (CPU) in a computer will communicate with the expansion cards through the expansion bus. or three) that indicate the status of the card. Some of the newer 100BaseTX cards will work on a 10BaseT network. On one side of the circuit card are a group of gold “fingers” that fit into the slot to provide the electrical connection. and PCI). so you will have to check the documentation to be sure of their meaning. An Ethernet card simply won’t work on a Token Ring network. Before purchasing a network card. Resolving these issues is actually quite simple. Some network cards provide diagnostic lights.

you can usually download them from the manufacturer’s web site.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide green light indicates that a proper network connection exists and a flashing yellow light indicates that data is being transferred. Finally. In most cases with a new card. Hint: you may not want to put the case back on until you have confirmed that the card is working. If your system is not Plug-n-Play. Understanding the installation process is the key to preventing conflicts. You still need to bind the card to the network protocols that you are going to use. you may need to download a new driver in order to make it work or to increase its performance. The details of installation will vary depending on the type of computer and the operating system installed. Card and Computer Installing a network adapter card is not any different than installing any other expansion card in a computer. be sure that no other device has already been assigned the IRQ or I/O address. 158 Specialized Solutions. you will need to check the documentation for the network operating system that you are using. Now the network adapter card is installed. but you are not finished yet. if you upgrade your operating system. Configure the IRQ and I/O address. you may still have to manually set some jumpers or switches. Physically install the card. You need to configure the card to work with your network software. Inc. the computer may not boot or the conflicting devices might not be able to work simultaneously. Connect the network cabling. . Note: If you must remove the case. Remove the case and install it into a free expansion slot. Install the appropriate drivers for the card. If there are any conflicts. be sure to follow ESD (electro-static discharge) procedures. Keep in mind that a green light does not mean that the computer is properly configured and you can use the network. Many operating systems already include drivers for most network cards. it only means that the proper connection has been established between the card and the network. First ensure that it is compatible with your system (network and computer). If you must do this manually. Note: Many computers that are designated as servers or gateways can have more than one network card installed. If you don’t have the driver or want to make sure that you have the latest driver. Since describing the installation of a network adapter card for every system is beyond the scope of this training course. this will be done with the installation software or by the operating system. In addition. Each card must be configured for a different network. the following is a generic procedure that defines the key points that you must follow: Purchase the card. Drivers are usually supplied with the network card.

as some individuals will not want to change their way of doing things just to have a network. To increase marketability of their cards. 159 . the card must have a coaxial BNC connector. Many growing companies purchase their computers only as needed and will select the best buy of the day. it can create havoc when you have to connect them and actually have them communicate. and possibly three. However. Computer Compatibility Computer compatibility is often a serious problem encountered when installing a network in an existing facility. AppleTalk employs a DIN-type connector and IBM Token Ring uses a DB-9 connector. it is your responsibility to point out the strengths and weaknesses of each scenario. as well as possible solutions. If you encounter this type of situation. different connectors allowing for multiple installation scenarios. You may have to connect some older “legacy” hardware with some new high-speed high-tech machines. These types of problems can be more personal in nature. For example. In the case of UTP. the card should have an RJ-45 connector. the engineering department may be PC-based.Chapter 6 – Network Design Media Compatibility Media compatibility is the ability of the cabling to physically connect to the card. the decision may end up with the company’s management and you will have to work with it. For example. For Thinnet or Thicknet. While this makes good sense to the accounting department. and the administrative department may just be thankful for having whatever they could get their hands on. the graphics arts department may be Macintosh-based. A typical problem encountered with highly departmentalized companies is that each department has its own preferences. Inc. The bottom line is to be sure to look before you buy. some manufacturers will provide two. Some STP cards require special connectors. Specialized Solutions.

you will need to establish the standards for your network. As long as the system is designed to meet the same standards. As the network designer or administrator. if installed. You will also need to know the type of processor and the type and number of available expansion slots. This will most likely require that you remove covers and identify components such as the modem and the network card. boot up each computer and note the operating system and any installed software. hard work and standards. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Preventing Compatibility Problems There are really only two methods of resolving compatibility issues. Hard Work Hard work and attention to detail are your only allies when it comes to setting up a network from an existing system. we learned about network protocols and standards. By defining the standards to which the network must comply. Standards Earlier in this training course. each component will work with the others. Standards are one way in which hardware and software suppliers can develop a product and be assured that it will work with the products of other suppliers. you are going to have your work cut out for you. with identical computers that were purchased from the same supplier. you should be able to predict potential hardware compatibility problems and take action to prevent them. and detail both its hardware and software. you will be assured that any new additions will function properly. Your only recourse is to document every computer and piece of hardware that must be connected to the network. With this information in hand. and knowledge of the network operating system. Unless you are very lucky and are installing a new network. that were identically configured. 160 Specialized Solutions. With this done. .

For example. Drivers for a particular device are not always available for all operating systems. when upgrading from Windows 98 to Windows XP. Specialized Solutions. the system will not run. you will be able to locate and download them from the manufacturer’s web site. network card and/or printer no longer work. 161 . You should always confirm the availability of drivers before purchasing an unknown device. If drivers exist. These are the bare minimum requirements to run the system. you find that your modem. all you need to do is install the Windows XP drivers for the offending hardware. Microsoft says that you do not need a mouse to run this operating system. A good example is Windows 95. you will need to check the manufacturer’s recommendations for the minimum requirements to operate. the Internet is the answer. Inc.Chapter 6 – Network Design Resolving Compatibility Problems No matter how careful you are. Most manufacturers will also publish suggested minimum requirements. The later Windows operating systems require a mouse as one of the minimum requirements. you will need to upgrade. there are several web sites that specialize in downloading drivers. Some devices do not have drivers for all operating systems. In this case. you probably do not have the necessary drivers. The networking industry is in a constant state of change and unless you want to be left behind. sooner or later you will encounter compatibility problems. have you ever tried it? You can run Windows 95 without a mouse by using only keystrokes. If the operating system was released after you purchased the device. These requirements by no means indicate what you should purchase. This is a true statement. however. These will be somewhat higher than the required minimum and are what you need to operate the system at a normal performance rate. but your proficiency will be very low. Also. More than likely. Most hardware compatibility problems are resolved by installing the latest drivers. Minimum Requirements When evaluating or considering an upgrade or change of an operating system. The first thing you need to do is determine if the original disks/CD that came with the device has the drivers to match the new operating system. only that if you don’t meet these requirements.

You can also look for the corresponding logos on the boxes of hardware and software that you are considering purchasing for your network. or hardware compatibility lists. If you want the latest list.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide The following table lists an example of the minimum requirements for three operating systems: HCL and Windows 2000 To help alleviate compatibility issues some manufacturers provide HCLs. 162 Specialized Solutions. you can get it from one of Microsoft’s web sites. or to confirm whether or not your existing hardware will work with Windows 2000. It is considered an advanced operating system and will not work with all hardware. Inc. If you were to purchase an econo-version of a computer or one that is highly proprietary. it most likely will not work with Windows 2000. Here you will find the latest information about hardware and software that is Designed for Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 or at least tested to be compatible with these operating systems. This list will ship with the 2000 package (on the CD-ROM) and 2000 will make a check during installation. you will need to check the HCL for that product. An operating system such as Microsoft Windows 2000 is hardware dependent. To assist in making an informed purchasing decision. especially with the newest operating systems such as Windows XP and Windows Server 2003. This is part of the Windows Logo program.com/windows/catalog. Microsoft Windows Catalog Still another web site to check for compatibility of hardware and software.microsoft. . is the Microsoft Windows Catalog at www.

Chapter 6 – Network Design Specialized Solutions. 163 . Inc.

7. However. but they are not all the same. he intends to expand the network in the future. Was this a good purchase? 9. What are the two tools required to initiate a network design? 2. Inc. Give one reason why you should recommend that he spend a little more now and install CAT 6 cabling instead of CAT 5. You are expanding your network and will need to invest in 50 to 100 new network cards. What are the two areas of concern when starting a network project? 3. Is NetBEUI a good protocol to use with a large WAN? 6. . Why should you refuse this offer? 8. What are the two most prominent reasons to choose a peer-to-peer network? 4. Your accounting office found a really good deal on network cards. Your company just bought ten new computers and all are guaranteed to meet the minimum requirements of Windows XP. Your client is installing a small Ethernet network and trying to save money at the same time.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 6 1. What is the number one reason for choosing a client/server network? 5. How do you know if a new piece of hardware will work with Windows XP? 164 Specialized Solutions.

For example. A hub is a device that acts like the central station for all computers on the network.Expanding a Network No matter how well you design a network. This chapter will discuss several techniques for expanding a network. you cannot use an Ethernet hub on a Token Ring network.” you may also hear them referred to as: • • • • Concentrators MAU or MSAU– Multistation Access Unit (Token Ring) Patch Panel SMAU – a Smart MAU Hubs can be either active or passive. Passive hubs do not use external power and are used only to concentrate the cables in a common location. Active hubs can be used to extend the length of network cabling by connecting them in a series. Specialized Solutions. from simple five-connector hubs used to connect five devices. it may be too small. Inc. Expanding a LAN with Hubs A common method for expanding networks is to use a hub. There are several different types of hubs. to larger hubs that can connect many more computers. In addition to being called “hubs. 165 .Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Chapter 7 . An active hub will require power and will often provide some form of signal conditioning (amplifies weak signals). sooner or later.

166 Specialized Solutions. Repeaters A repeater is a device that is used to extend the cable length on a network. but has one additional feature. there are several other devices that can be used to expand a network. They do not translate or filter any information. amplify the signal. They do however. You are just plain tired of your old system and want to get your system updated. the simple hub just won’t do the job. Inc. Long waits to access a printer or file.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide When a LAN is Too Small There are several reasons to consider expanding a LAN: • • • • Too much network traffic. Fortunately. When the time comes to make a serious expansion to a LAN. thereby compensating for signal loss due to long cable lengths. . Each has its own unique advantages and disadvantages. Repeater Bridges A bridge does the same things as a repeater. Repeaters work in the Physical Layer of the OSI model. such as databases. Bridges work in the Data Link Layer of the OSI model. thus reducing the traffic for each segment. Traffic-generating applications. you will have to employ one or more different pieces of hardware. have increased response times. A bridge can be used to isolate segments on a LAN. Depending on the objectives of the LAN.

Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Bridge Routers A router has all of the features of a bridge. Specialized Solutions. Not all network protocols will work with a router. Router Gateway Gateways make it possible to connect different network architectures. Inc. 167 . Think of a gateway as a computer that acts as a translator between two networks that don’t speak the same language. but it can switch packets across multiple networks. Routers work at the Network layer of the OSI model. Routers can also determine the best path for “routing” traffic and filter broadcast traffic on the local segment. It is an entrance to another network that controls traffic on your network. For example. the NetBEUI protocol is not routable.

and the cost of the service. An example of such a system is the telephone company. With dial-up networking. but connecting at this rate is rare. Carriers Carriers are the companies that we contract with to carry our data over long distances. these connections are slow and not very reliable. does not mean that it is the best value. When considering which connection service to use. When thinking of telephone lines. we most commonly think of our local telephone company or one of the long distance carriers. lines. each computer must use a modem and establish a direct connection. Speed for leased lines can reach 45 Mbps. . microwave. These are our standard telephone connections. Inc. 168 Specialized Solutions. The second choice is leased.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Gateway Connection Services When expanding a network beyond the local area cable boundaries. and satellite connections. there are two levels of service to consider. Keep in mind that there are many carrier companies that provide many different services at a variety of rates. Be sure to compare them on an equal basis and look for hidden costs. The first is public dial-up network lines. Typically. They are providing the cabling. or dedicated. When thinking of a carrier. it is likely that you will need to connect to a third party’s cabling system. be sure to take into account your throughput. Be careful when choosing a carrier. Just because the cost looks good. the distance the data must travel. These powerful full-time dedicated connections do not use a series of switches to complete the connection. Some of the newer digital services will claim to have a speed of 56 Kbps.

The DSU is responsible for converting both the input and output between the frame types between the LAN and the WAN. Most WANs are a collection of LANs. and deals with timing issues. You can also use ISDN adapters if you are using ISDN PRI for WAN connectivity. There are two types of PSTN: dial-up lines and dedicated analog lines. as well as those transmitted to it. A CSU/DSU (Channel Service Unit/Data Service Unit) is a hardware device responsible for changing the frame type from whatever the LAN is using into a frame that will work on the WAN. Specialized Solutions. It also changes the frame type back when frames are sent back. Inc. It can regenerate the signal. These physically larger networks will appear to function the same as a LAN. The CSU is responsible for both the signals received from the WAN. routers and communications services are used to create a WAN. items such as bridges. 169 . if necessary. It is based on PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network).Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network WAN Overview When the physical capabilities and distance limits of a LAN need to be exceeded. Communication between LANs will involve one of the following technologies: • • • Analog Digital Packet Switching Analog Connectivity Analog communication is the one that we are most familiar with. WAN links can include any of the following: • • • • • Cable Television Coaxial Systems Fiber-Optic Cable Microwave Transmitters Packet Switched Networks Satellite Links Those using a WAN link to connect LANs will need to use CSU/DSUs.

Basic data. Dedicated analog lines provide an instant connection. more secure line than can be provided by an analog connection. you need DDS (Digital Data Service). Voice and data over trunk circuits.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Analog Signal The dial-up lines can be further classified as: Line Type Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Basic voice. they can be justified. Voice and data over private lines. but if you have sufficient traffic. The down-side of these lines is that you will have to pay for them 100% of the time instead of on an “as used” basis. Data applications below 1200 bps. . Application relays. Voice and video. Voice and data over trunks between computers. Dedicated lines are far more expensive. This is because you lease the line 100% of the time and therefore do not have to dial-in. Inc. Digital Connectivity When you need a faster. The primary reason for using digital lines is that they are 99% error-free. Voice/radio with tone conditioning. 170 Specialized Solutions. Voice with some quality control.

368 Mbps Varies depending ISP.048 Mbps 34.544 Mbps 44. It can be used to transmit digital voice. faster download than upload 51. 171 . whereas the E1 and the E3 are the European standard.736 Mbps 2.520 or 622. The following table lists the most common connection types: Connection Type T1 T3 E1 E3 XDSL T1/E1/OC1 Channels 1 28 1 16 N/A Voice Channels DATA RATE (MBPS) 24 672 32 512 N/A 1. and video signals. It is capable of 1.080 (can reach 10 Gbps) OC-1 OC-3 ATM 1 3 N/A N/A N/A N/A The T1 and the T3 standard are American.544 Mbps transmissions.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Digital Signal T1 is the most widely used type of digital line. data.8 Mbps 155. Inc.52 Mbps Either 155. Specialized Solutions.

be used for somewhat secure remote access by employing the use of virtual private networks (VPNs) and tunneling protocols. since the infrastructure of the phone line we use today was created long before the advent of the personal computer and the Internet. A packet switched network provides multiple paths that packets could travel from source to destination. . 172 Specialized Solutions. Inc. all of which are considered reliable. Frame Relay does not check the packet at each step in its route. Circuit-switched Network Packet Switching Networks Packet switching is a means of providing fast. In older. X. however. This made for a very reliable and very slow connection. convenient. With Frame Relay. Today’s networks use a different technology referred to as Frame Relay. These lines can. POTS (Plain Old Telephone Service) or the telephone lines are the most common example of this type of network. and reliable network messaging.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Circuit-switched Networks Circuit-switched networks set up a continuous direct connection between the individual calling and the one being called. this particular type of network is not suited for most companies’ business needs. each packet was examined at each step in the path to determine whether it was damaged.25 based packet switched networks. For this reason. Obviously. Standard PSTN lines have a very limited bandwidth of less than 56 Kbps. so it can be both reliable and fast. a packet may be sent over multiple permanent virtual circuits (PVCs).

adding computers or adjusting resources. It is best understood as a “logical” LAN.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Packet Switching VLAN Virtual LANs (VLANs) can be viewed as a group of devices on different physical LAN segments that can communicate with each other as if they were all on the same physical LAN segment.) by another means apart from how they are connected physically and geographically. or by the specific use of the computers. This allows the administrator the luxury of modifying the VLAN. Inc. printers. etc. This type of network is most closely associated with a “campus environment. which lays out hosts (computers. or any other logical means. 173 .” Specialized Solutions. without having to change the physical picture of the network. An administrator might set up a VLAN based on certain departments within his company.

However. . While not a good choice for WANs. you might consider some of the advanced WAN technologies. ATM is relatively new and will require special hardware and bandwidth to reach its full potential. It is.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide VLAN Advanced WAN Environments If the existing services available do not meet the needs of your WAN. These systems are designed to operate at a throughput rate of 1. This means that the choice of media will limit the maximum speed of the network. in actuality. which is intended for use in the home or small business. ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network was one of the early digital services. ATM can be used with FAX. however. It will support 500 computers and run at 100 Mbps. media limited. Because it is fiber optic-based. it is a good choice for LANs that require large bandwidth and high speeds. it will provide a secure network that is immune to interference. twisted pair. has two 64 Kbps 174 Specialized Solutions. It was designed specifically for Token Ring networks and has a maximum ring length of 100 Kilometers (62 miles). As well as the common voice and data. and focuses on the home and business market. or fiber optic. ATM is not media dependent and will operate on coaxial. FDDI . These cells can speed communication because the network always know exactly what to expect in regard the size of the next cell. they currently operate at as high as 622 Mbps with most commercial boards operating at 155 Mbps.Asynchronous transfer mode uses fixed length (53 byte) cells instead of packets. video. Inc. One of these may just provide you with the necessary bandwidth and speed that you need.Fiber Distributed Data Interface is the basis of fiber optic communication.2 Gbps. audio. while using copper telephone wires. and imaging. ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface). ATM .

To be more precise. Internationally. Specialized Solutions. it is the European equivalent of SONET. much like E1 is to T1. like OCx with SONET. a call.Switched Multimegabit Data Service offers high bandwidth at speeds of up to 34 Mbps. The data-rate can vary anywhere from STM-1 (155 Mbps) up to STM-64 (10 Gbps).Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network B-channels for data or voice (128 Kbps). which is intended for use by large businesses. and one 64 Kbps D-channel for control. Inc. SONET SONET (Synchronous Optical Network) is a fiber optic-based technology that specifies the speeds at which the equipment can multiplex signals from sources into high-speed carrier devices. This service is provided by some local companies and works well for MAN installations (compatible with IEEE 802. ISDN PRI (Primary Rate Interface).6). and one 16 Kbps D-channel for control. has twentythree 64 Kbps B-channels for data or voice (1. SDH SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy) is a standard technology for synchronous data transmission on optical media. data and video at rates ranging from 51. within one transmission frame. 175 .544 Mbps). SMDS SMDS . It uses Synchronous Transport Modules (STM).84 Mbps (OC-1) all the way up to 40 Gbps (OC-768). it is considered the equivalent of Synchronous Optical Network. It carries all the bits from say. It includes a set of signal rate multiples for transmitting digital signals on optical fiber (OCx). It is capable of transmitting voice.

Therefore. . and media. Convert the parallel digital data into serial digital data. This limit cannot be exceeded without encountering signal distortion. To increase our network beyond a few computers. Modems transmit data at various speeds. 176 Specialized Solutions. there is a limit of 2400 Baud. connecting a few computers to form a local area network requires cabling and network cards. Modems are classified by a “V” rating. designers learned how to place several signals within one cycle. 14. FAX modems will send and receive data at speeds up to 14. Sometimes included with the purchase of a computer. due to the physical characteristics of copper wire and the effects of transmitting signals over long distances. times as fast as the Baud rate. Speeds will range from very slow speeds of 300 bps to 56. These speeds are measured as bits per second. As we have already learned.600 bps. Today. Originally modem speeds were measured in terms of Baud. etc.600 bps. the Baud rate was equal to the bps. To overcome this and increase the speeds of data transmission via modems. A modem is a device that makes it possible to communicate long distances over standard telephone lines or cable. The Baud rate equals the frequency in cycles per second that can be transmitted via telephone lines. The following is a list of common “V” ratings: Standard V. 4. or over long distances. Some of the basic functions of a modem are to: • • Convert digital signals used by computers into analog signals that can be transmitted via telephone lines. With this change. 8. modems have reached a new technology limit of 56. the term Baud has disappeared and been replaced with bps.32 standard. a given Baud rate could transmit data at 2.400 bps. requires some additional hardware that will overcome the limitations of the cables.22bis V. Sometimes included with the purchase of a computer.32bis bps 2400 9600 Notes An old standard. However.400 High-speed version of the V.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Modems Expanding a network requires an understanding of the additional devices necessary to make the connections. Inc. The name is derived from the words MOdulate and DEModulate. network cards. Modems are available in both internal (standard expansion card) and external (connected to a serial port and has its own power supply) versions. With early modems. The problem with these devices is that they all have limitations that prevent long distance communication.32 V.

42 V.90 19. 57.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network V. Inc.32terbo V.800 Improved V.200 Not officially a standard yet. 177 . Specialized Solutions. modems – error correction standard. Backwards compatible with earlier V. Will only communicate with another V. 28.FastClass.34 V.32terbo.600 56K modem standard – resolved competition for standard between US Robotic X2 and Rockwell K56 Flex standards. modems.600 Backwards compatible with earlier V. 56.

either via modems and telephone lines. On the other hand. The difference between a simple computer (Windows XP or Windows 95/98) and a RAS server (such as Windows Server 2003) is the number of inbound connections. both of these terms mean the same thing. For example. This is a specially wired cable that actually replaces the modem. Let’s first look at connecting two computers. You must use a Null-Modem cable. A system running Windows XP or Windows 95/98 will allow only one inbound connection. Dial-up networking is the client-side of the connection. all you need to do is connect a cable between a COM port on each computer. Actually. the COM port provides the parallel to serial data conversion that is necessary to complete a connection. the server that you call (your Internet Service Provider) is providing a RAS connection to you – it is the server that is providing the connection to the Internet for you. or RAS (pronounced RAZ) connection. Any two computers can be connected. there will be no need to connect to telephone wires or dial a number. The trick is that you cannot use just any cable with 9-pin female connectors. You may be more familiar with the term dial-up network (DUN). In addition. or directly via COM ports and a cable. . Windows XP has an feature called a direct cable connection. By running Network Connections Wizard and following the simple 178 Specialized Solutions. when you access your Internet connection from your computer at home (via a modem connection) you are establishing a dial-up connection –you are the client. Inc. while a true server like Windows Server 2003 will allow 256 inbound connections. Since the two computers are directly connected. the computer is acting as a server or gateway to a network and will receive calls via a modem from other computers. A COM port is a 9pin male connector (it can be 25-pin but this is not as common as the 9-pin) on the back of the computer. There are many off-the-shelf software packages that will perform this type of communication. Also. RAS Connection Connecting Two Computers Establishing a remote connection can be either between two computers or between a remote computer and a network. With RAS. so this cable eliminates that part of a modem connection.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Remote Access Computing (RAS) One of the most common forms of expanding a network is through a Remote Access Server. The difference is how each computer is being utilized. When connecting two computers in close proximity (same room or building). Both computers will have to run compatible software so that one will act as a server and the other as a client.

From this accessory.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network instructions provided. your computer will have to make the phone call and provide the necessary security authentication information to the server. Inc. On the server side. both computers must be using the same protocol. RAS Protocols In order for any connection to work. the client computer will establish the connection via DUN software. On the client side. in this case. While this was the protocol of choice for a Specialized Solutions. 179 . This is a relatively old standard (1984). With this in place. you can set up the proper configuration for the connection and dial the appropriate number. Windows (95/98 and NT) has an accessory called Dial-Up Networking. you can connect any two Windows-based computers and share data with only a cable connection. The server you are contacting may be an individual computer or a server that provides access to a larger network. but is still in use with some systems. These protocols are: • • • • • • • • • SLIP (Single Line Interface Protocol) PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) L2TP (Layer Two Tunneling Protocol) SSL (Secure Socket Layer) TLS (Transport Layer Security) Kerberos (Greek mythology – three-headed canine who guards Hades’ gates) ICA (Independent Computing Architecture) SLIP (Single Line Interface Protocol) Serial Line Interface Protocol is a standard protocol for connections using TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol). you will use a modem to establish the connection. the RAS software must be installed and running. Normally. the server will answer the phone and allow the connection if you are an authorized user. Direct Cable Connection Making a RAS connection to a server is similar to a direct connection but. RAS/DUN supports various connection protocols to ensure proper connections and security.

NetBEUI. and DECnet. It supports only TCP/IP. Some of these disadvantages include: • • • • • It requires a static IP address for each node.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide long time. . It is designed to protect IP packets as well as to provide defense against network attacks. It can be used in conjunction with VPNs (Virtual Private 180 Specialized Solutions. PPP was intended to overcome these limitations and is very common today. VPN (Virtual Private Networks). PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) provides for a secure encrypted tunnel for communication through the Internet. RAS and Security. It provides security. created by PPTP and other tunneling protocols. It’s only supported by RAS clients. With the rapid growth of the Internet and remote communications. • • • • • IPsec IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) is a framework of open standards for security at the Network layer of the OSI model. It enables highly private network links over the public Internet. Some of these improvements include: • • • • Support for TCP/IP. the limits of SLIP caused many problems. IPX. It cannot encrypt logon information. AppleTalk. It transmits in text only. It provides data compression and error control. It supports encrypted passwords. Secure transmission over TCP/IP networks. in today’s networks it has several disadvantages. Inc. Many organizations are using tunnels. as a less explensive alternative to costly leased lines. PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) The Point-to-Point Protocol was designed as an upgraded protocol to SLIP. Encrypted Connections. This is accomplished by encapsulating one protocol with another protocol. such that only the sender and the receiver can accurately interpret the data that is being sent.

509) and preshared keys can be used for authentication in conjunction with IPsec. and Macintosh computers. It can work with SSL and uses Triple DES encryption (three 56-bit keys). it only establishes the user’s identity. certificates (like X.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Networks) and remote access for users who need access to resources on a private network. as does Novell Directory Services (NDS). SSL The Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is a protocol for addressing the security of an Internet transmission between a client and a server. most relating to higher security. L2TP Layer Two Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) is the latest version of the tunneling protocol. ICA (Independent Computing Architecture) ICA is a remote connection established using Citrix software (like WinFrame or MetaFrame) and a thin client environment. It is transparent to the user. It is included in both Microsoft’s Internet Explorer and Netscape’s Navigator and it is a complimentary addition to HTTPS. it does not require IP connectivity.. Kerberos V5. It combines Cisco’s Layer 2 Forwarding (L2F) with PPTP. and a processor in the range of 200 MHz to 300 MHz. limited RAM. authenticates the sender of data and encrypts the data as well. which is the highest security method. It is based on an end-to-end security model. discussed here in the next chapter. Kerberos Kerberos is a secure method for authenticating a request for a service in a computer network. Unlike PPTP. a bare-bones operating system (such as Windows CE). Specialized Solutions. meaning that the computers. L2TP offers many advantages over PPTP. ICA can be used with Windows. Thin clients are computers with no hard drive. It does not provide authorization. are the ones aware of the IPsec transmission. ESP. UNIX. Linux. IPsec allows for either ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload) or AH (Authentication Header). usually a user’s credit card number. It functions at the Data-link layer of the OSI model and is used in conjunction with VPNs. Inc. both sending and receiving. 181 . AH only authenticates the user. It allows a user to request an encrypted ticket. . It uses a key to encrypt the data. Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003 Active Directory use this type of security by default. or virtual proof-of-identity cards so the user can request a service from a server. TLS TLS (Transport Layer Security) is the evolution of SSL.

your new RAS system may not be able to gain access. As with all security measures. you can restrict the numbers that RAS will call. RAS provides several layers of security. you will have to carefully go through all the configuration parameters and check every one. Here is a summary of RAS security functions: Auditing The server can create and maintain an audit trail of all connections. The type of communication port you intend to configure. All it takes is one number or check mark out of place to prevent the connection from working properly. This feature can also be used to ensure long distance charges are charged to the company rather than the caller. If another software package has “control” of the modem. the modem configuration. and any other software that might use the modem. 182 Specialized Solutions. Inc. This audit can include who signed on and when they signed on. If it does not work the first time. In addition. Callback Security One method of providing both security and cost control is to require the server to callback anyone that attempts to logon. At a minimum you will need to know the following: • • • Your modem specifications including having the appropriate drivers for your network and/or computer operating system. installing RAS can be frustrating. and thus more security. therefore ensuring that the connection is legitimate. Security Host (Bastion Host) A security host or bastion host is a separate server that works between the RAS server and the client. you must implement or enable them during configuration of the RAS server. Be sure to check everything including the RAS configuration.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide In addition to providing remote sharing of information. you will need to collect data on the type of connection you intend to make and the specifics of the computer hardware and network. . Before installation. you will have to collect all the information from your operating system supplier to ensure that you have everything necessary. This is a great benefit for those who travel for business and need access to the network. Installing and Configuring RAS Installing RAS on a server is dependent on the network operating system installed on the server. Are there any client protocols that will have to be enabled? • What are the security requirements of the connection/network? Troubleshooting a RAS setup While not usually complicated. This provides for additional authentication. By requiring RAS to call back to the client that is requesting a connection.

Specialized Solutions. 183 . it is not always the solution for every network. The latest Microsoft server operating systems such as Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 have wizards that make installing an RAS server much simpler.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Limitations of RAS As good as RAS is. and you don’t need a fulltime connection. You should consider RAS when your bandwidth is less than 128 Kbps. you will need to understand both its strengths and weaknesses. As a networking professional. you want to keep the costs down. Inc.

Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. Keyword Analog Signal Bridge Carrier Concentrator CSU/DSU Digital Signal DUN Frame Relay Gateway Hubs ICA Ipsec ISDN Kerberos L2TP MAU PPP PPTP RAS Repeater Router SDH 184 Specialized Solutions. Definition .

Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Keyword SLIP SMAU SONET SSL T1 VLAN X. 185 . Inc.25 Definition Specialized Solutions.

Describe the difference between BAUD and bps. What are the two components of remote network accessing? 8. What is the difference between a hub and a MAU? 2. a router. Name four forms of RAS security. What is the difference between an active hub and a passive hub? 3. What is analog communication? 5. 7. 4. Define a repeater. Name three RAS protocols. 10. and a gateway. A form of digital line that is capable of 1. a bridge. 186 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 7 1. 9. Name three advanced WAN environments. .544 Mbps transmissions is called? 6. Inc.

187 . Inc.Chapter 7 – Expanding a Network Specialized Solutions.

.

intranets. It is important for the networking professional to know that TCP/IP is used on the Internet and that it can be used with almost any network operating system. The four layers are: Application. The TCP/IP suite consists of four layers. From this beginning. TCP/IP. Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) is the most common Transport layer protocol (based on the OSI Model). These standards. which will be discussed later in the chapter. This is the most common protocol suite with which a networking professional works. It is also used with Ethernet networks. such as SMTP. The TCP/IP protocol suite includes a number of protocols. and were even built into the Berkeley Standard Distribution. some are considered to be Internet standards. RFC (Request For Comments) A series of documents called RFCs (Request For Comments) serve as the standards that were used in the development of TCP/IP. Specialized Solutions. Each layer maps to one or more layers of the OSI model. SNMP. and is usually seen in the combination. known as BSD UNIX. TCP/IP is an open protocol and is considered to be an industry standard. Full duplex means that data can travel in both directions at once. TCP/IP was designed to accommodate a large internetworking environment comprising several different types of computers. TCP is built on top of IP (Internet Protocol). TCP/IP is now the standard on all versions of UNIX. as well as Internet standards. Transport.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Introduction to TCP/IP TCP/IP is an internet (between network) protocol. Its popularity is largely attributed to the fact that it is not owned by a specific vendor. TCP/IP is a routable protocol that provides full duplex connections. these protocols were available on UNIX early on. 189 . TCP/IP was developed by the Department of Defense agency (DARPA) in the 1960s as part of a military research project. Although RFCs are not true standards (they are documents that describe work in progress). and FTP. the recognized standard for internetworking altogether. and the Internet. and is in fact. are the responsibility of the IAB (Internet Activities Board). Internet and Network Interface. Inc. Also. it has evolved into the protocol of the Internet.

Inc. There are actually five protocols that work within these layers to provide network connections.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide TCP/IP and OSI The four layers that make up TCP/IP provide a guideline for this model. . These five protocols are: • • • • • TCP.Transmission Control Protocol UDP – User Datagram Protocol IP – Internet Protocol ICMP – Internet Control Message Protocol ARP – Address Resolution Protocol 190 Specialized Solutions.

191 . Inc.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Specialized Solutions.

TCP Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) functions at the Transport Layer of the OSI Model. you will need to know the various protocols and how they relate to the OSI model. A port is a virtual outlet that can be opened on a network device. Inc. . However. or into even smaller units of measurement called datagrams. they can be retransmitted in a timely manner. This data exchange can be verified at various checkpoints. there are five major protocols used within TCP/IP. It then routes the information to its destination. The Top Five TCP/IP Protocols As mentioned earlier. On a TCP/IP network. Port numbers are generally predetermined and correspond to a specific service that is running on a machine. Let’s take a look at how this works. Port numbers for some protocols are better known than others. Its job is to ensure that data transferred from one computer to another reaches its destination intact. It will then use the concept of sliding windows and acknowledgements to ensure fast and accurate data transmission. Let’s take a look at them. TCP breaks data into tiny chunks. and for the Network+ exam. called packets. Should lost or corrupted packets be detected. and reassembles the data. The following list provides a few examples: For: FTP TELNET SMTP HTTP POP3 Use Port 21 23 25 80 110 192 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide TCP/IP Protocols As a network technician. you will not have to be an expert on the workings of TCP/IP. TCP operates by first establishing a connection-oriented session through the use of ports and sockets. the origination point and destination point of the computers between which data travels are called ports.

The private or dynamic ports are associated with the range from 49152 through 65535. i. A socket is the combination of an IP address and a port number. The registered ports are associated with the range from 1024 through 49151. HTTP. TCP will retransmit the data. Think of it as a return receipt like the one you get from the Post Office when you want to be sure that a package has been delivered. The addresses.. This communication is called a session and is used to provide guaranteed delivery between the two machines. meaning that it establishes an end-to-end connection and starts transmitting without swapping control information. UDP transports data. inserting its own header into the datagram when it is received from TCP. The well-known ports are associated with the range of possible port numbers from 0 through 1023. Both machines have a sending and receiving window to buffer the data flow. an acknowledgement of receipt is returned. IP merely routes the data. IP is connectionless. Although the terms. UDP packets are delivered through ports and sockets and do not require the opening of a session. the protocol number. The IP header consists of the source and destination addresses. The port number identifies the application associated with the data. This allows a receiving machine to collect packets out of order and hold them in a buffer until all packets in a specified group are received. For each packet sent.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials The sending computer’s address is called the source port number. and specify a certain protocol.e. nor does it check for errors. 193 . TCP tells IP that the data has arrived at its destination. The advantage of UDP over TCP is speed and is often used when transmitting streaming audio or video. Inc. etc. you are automatically connected to the correct port for that particular data type. a port is different from a socket. IP Internet Protocol (IP) is the Network layer part of TCP/IP. Connection-Oriented Communication means that direct communication is established between two machines. and the receiving computer’s address is called the destination port number. When you open a dial-up connection to the Internet. Acknowledgements are used to ensure the reliability of the data being transmitted. UDP User Datagram Protocol (UDP) is a connectionless protocol residing on the Transport layer of the OSI Model. “port” and “socket” are often used interchangeably. or port numbers. Transmission speed is increased by sending a window of information at a time without having to get an acknowledgment back for each packet. Both machines keep track of the data so that any packets not received can be resent. but does not acknowledge delivery. Telnet.535. which is responsible for moving the data from its origination point to its destination point. Sliding windows are used to increase the speed of data transfer. FTP. If the transmission has not been successful. consist of a unique 16-bit numeric address ranging from 0 to 65. and a Specialized Solutions.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide checksum. The IP header is necessary so that gateways are able to determine where to route the datagram. Note: A checksum is simply a calculation that is performed on data by the sending computer. To be more specific, the checksum is the answer that is derived from this calculation. When the data arrives at the destination computer, the receiving computer performs the calculation. If the checksum is the same, the data is assumed to have arrived intact. The following are key elements of IP: Addressing – provides the address of both the sending and receiving machines. Broadcast – provides broadcast addressing within a network segment. Fragmenting and Reassembly – if data packets are too large for the underlying network, it will be broken down into a manageable packet size for transport. Routeability – provides routing information from one network to another. Time to Live – provides TTL data. This defines the number of hops a packet can make before it is discarded. ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol is part of the Internet layer. It is responsible for errors and messages regarding delivery of IP datagrams. ARP The Address Resolution Protocol is responsible for keeping track of the mapping of IP addresses to physical addresses. Each device on the network maintains an ARP cache. This cache contains a list of all the devices with which it is communicating. The contents of a cache can be displayed by using the ARP.exe command in Windows or the /sbin/arp command under UNIX. Other TCP/IP Protocols In addition to the top five, TCP/IP uses several other protocols: POP3 Post Office Protocol Version 3 (POP3) allows the client computer to retrieve E-mail from a POP3 server using a temporary connection. IMAP4 Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) is also a protocol for accessing email from your local server. Your Internet server holds your incoming email until users logon and download it. It is more advanced than POP3 because you can use folders and mailboxes on the server, run searches, or access multiple mail servers. 194 Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials POP and IMAP allow a client to pull their mail from a server. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), a protocol for transferring e-mail between points on the Internet, which is what you use when you send out mail. SMTP is server to server, whereas POP or IMAP are client to server. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is a server-to-server protocol that acts under the control of the message transport system. SMTP is used to transfer E-mail between computers, usually over the Internet. An easy way to think of it is SMTP stands for “Send Mail To People.” SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the Internet protocol that manages nodes (individual computers) on an IP network. SNMP is not limited to TCP/IP. FTP File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a client-server protocol that allows a user to transfer files from one computer to another over a TCP/IP network. The user accesses a special directory hierarchy containing public access files, by typing in a user name, or the word “anonymous.” The password is the user’s E-mail address. Files may then be uploaded or downloaded between the computers. HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is a client-server protocol that is used on the World Wide Web (www) to access HTML documents, such as web pages. HTTPS HTTPS (Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol) is a Web protocol that encrypts and decrypts, using SSL as a sub layer underneath HTTP, allowing access to a secure Web server. It uses port 443, the secure SSL port instead of port 80, the HTTP port. HTTPS, as well as SSL, allow for the use of X.509 digital certificates for authentication of a user.

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

195

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide

196

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials

Naming Systems
Naming conventions and addressing is a large part of networking and TCP/IP. Remember, we are working in two worlds, the computer world of numbers and our world of user-friendly names. Understanding the difference between these two worlds and how to work in both of them is an important part of networking. DNS Domain Name Service (DNS) is a network service that translates hostnames to IP addresses over a TCP/IP network. The network administrator defines and configures the DNS settings using a standardized lookup table. DNS functions like a telephone directory. The network administrator need only remember the host and domain names. A domain name server is a computer that "remembers" the user-friendly names of the other computers and their IP address numbers. For example, the domain bigcompany.com may have an IP address of 192.49.238.33. This allows users to simply remember the userfriendly name while the domain name server remembers the numbers used by the network computers. A domain is a group of computers that share a common general purpose, such as government, education, commerce, or interest. Internet domains are established in a hierarchical order. A Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) consists of a hostname and a domain name. The Internet Network Information Center (InterNIC, also known as Network Solutions) controls the top-level domains. These domains require suffixes such as .com for businesses or .edu for educational institutions. It is also common practice for various companies to register domain names for you.

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

197

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide The following table lists some Internet domains:

.com .net .edu .org .gov .mil .biz .pro .info .xx

Commercial Organizations Networks (The backbone of the Internet.) Educational Institutions Non-profit Organizations Non-military Government Organizations Military Government Organizations Businesses Professional Information services Two Letter Country Code For instance, Big Company Inc. in Italy might be http://www.Bigcompany.com.it or in Australia www.Bigcompany.com.au. Also, .tv is gaining in popularity. Tuvalu is a small country, which receives financial benefit from the registration fees.

WINS In a Windows-based network, the Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) is used to resolve NetBIOS computer names to their IP addresses. This is a dynamic service and requires that the workstation register with the WINS server each time it logs on to the network. NETBIOS NetBIOS defines a session-level interface and a session management/data transport protocol so computers can converse in session mode or send messages without connection in datagram mode, leaving the responsibility for error-checking up to the application. A NetBIOS name is a unique 16-byte address (only 15 can be used for the actual name) used to identify a NetBIOS resource on a network. There are four node types: B-node (broadcast), P-node (peer-peer), M-node (mixed – B and P) and H-node (hybrid – P and B). 198 Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials HOSTS file HOSTS file is a static text file that maps host names to IP. It predates DNS. It must be manually created and changed. LMHOSTS file LMHOSTS is static text file that are used to look up and resolve NetBIOS names and IP addresses. It predates WINS and is rarely used today. It must be manually created and changed. IP Gateway A gateway is used to connect two networks with dissimilar protocols. For example, it could connect a LAN to the Internet. In order for a gateway to work with the Internet, it must be assigned a static IP address. This means that it is permanently assigned. It would be difficult to find if it were constantly changing. DHCP Assigning IP addresses is like assigning telephone numbers, sooner or later we will run out of numbers. In smaller isolated networks, IP address assignment is not a big problem and each workstation or device can have a static address. However, as the number of addresses required increases, you will sooner or later come up with a number shortage. To resolve this, IP addresses can be dynamically assigned. That is, assigned on an “as needed” basis. Each host will lease an address only for the period of time required. When not needed, the address can be leased to another host. To accomplish this, you will need to use Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP). Upon logon a DHCP server will provide a client with an IP address, subnet mask, and a default gateway if needed. Notice that the IP addresses are leased. This means that they will expire after a specific amount of time. This is to prevent one user from monopolizing the connection. A lease can be renewed. When the term of the lease is at 50%, the client will send a request for renewal. If the demand for connections is low (there are spaces available), the lease will be renewed without interruption. If not renewed, the client will attempt to contact the DHCP server that issued it the IP address directly about every 5 minutes until it reaches 87.5% of the lease, at which time the client will broadcast a request to obtain an address from any available DHCP server. If all addresses are being used or a DHCP server does not respond, the lease will expire and the address will be assigned to another user. In this case, the original user will have to wait for an opening before getting another lease and a new IP address. BOOTP BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) is a protocol that is used by diskless workstations to obtain their IP addresses (as well as the server’s address and its default gateway) from a BOOTP server. BOOTP was the foundation of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP).

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

199

200 Specialized Solutions. but it is most often used between a private network and the networks public address or addresses. NAT also acts as a type of firewall. It contains DHCP. and DNS. IP Proxy Servers Earlier. the proxy server. The proxy server is actually making a connection to another network or to the Internet on behalf of the client. NAT. to share a single connection to the Internet. In the case of a proxy server. it serves many clients through only one connection. Inc. It can also work in conjunction with Routing and Remote access. Proxy Server ICS ICS allows computers within a network. like a LAN.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Connection Utilities NAT NAT (Network Address Translation) is the translation of an IP address used within an organization internally (private IP address) to an IP seen by the Internet (public IP address). The user is connecting to the Internet via a secondary source.e. The proxy server may function in the role of the server or the client. . who think they are communicating directly with one another. depending on the direction in which the communication is traveling at any given time. The proxy server is a liaison between the two parties. Compare this to a “he said-she said” scenario where an intermediary delivers the message between two parties who do not speak directly to each other. ICS allows multiple users to fully utilize that connection by performing different tasks at the same time. It allows for use of one public IP address for many private IP addresses. we talked about the client/server relationship in terms of the roles of various users and servers. Actually. i. a NAT is just a device or program that translates one set of IP addresses to another set of IP addresses. since it keeps the private IP addresses hidden from the outside world.

201 .Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Specialized Solutions. Inc.

202 Specialized Solutions. The result is called a dotted decimal number. the administrator may assign an IP address to each computer (as long as the number is unique).11000010 Each octet represents a number between 0-256: 1st octet: 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------16 8 2 1 128 64 32 4 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 ----------------------------------------------------------------128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 ----------------------------------------------------------------32 16 8 4 2 1 128 64 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Adding the values assigned to the “1” positions gives us a value of 33 for the first octet. A basic knowledge of the binary numbering system is required to understand network addressing: The 32-bit binary number: 00100001001001110000100011000010 Broken down into four octets: 00100001. So the dotted decimal address of our example is 33. they are broken down into four octets.8.967. . A 32-bit binary number can represent (232) or 4. To simplify these addresses.39. let’s now take a look at IP address numbers. Imagine how difficult it would be to have to remember a combination of 32 1s and 0s for each address.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide TCP/IP Addressing IPv4 Enough talk about IP address names. It is important that the networking professional have a basic understanding of these classes.00100111. 3rd octet: The value of the 3rd octet in our example is 8. Each of these octets represents a number from 0-256. it is not easy for us. Network computers require a unique IP address so that the other computers on the network can identify them and be able to communicate with them. 4th octet: And finally the value of our 4th octet is 194.2 billion) different numbers.296 (4.194. Although that is easy for a computer. however. If a network is internal and does not access the Internet.00001000. are assigned by the Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers (ICANN) and these IP addresses are further divided into classes. 2nd octet: The value of the 2nd octet is 39. Internet IP addresses. Inc. This IP address is a 32-bit binary number.294. An octet is a group of eight binary digits and a period or “dot” separates these octets.

An example of a Class C IP address would be 193. The class of the IP address determines which octets identify the Network ID and which octets identify the Host ID. Within classes. you should pay special attention the Classes A.194 where the Network ID would be 193. The first octet in a Class B address is always a number between 128 and 191.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials IP Addresses The dotted decimal number is further broken down into two components.) The first octet in a Class A address is always a number between 1 and 126. The two octets in the center can be either assigned to the Network ID or the Host ID. only the first octet is used for the Network ID and all three remaining octets identify the host (Host ID). (A host may be any device on the network. Class B Addresses This class is assigned to medium sized networks. the network is divided into classes. Class A Class B Class C Class A Addresses If the network applying for Internet IP addresses is extremely large.194. 01-126 128-191 192-223 (leading bit = 0) (leading bit = 1) (leading bits =11) Specialized Solutions. In this class the first three octets are used for the Network ID and only the last octet is used for the Host ID. Class D and Class E Addresses Class D cannot be used for networks (multicast) and Class E IP addresses are reserved for future use.8. B and C.39 would be the Network ID and 8.194 would be an example of a Class A address.39.194 would be the Host ID. The example we used to define a dotted decimal address of 33. The first two octets identify the network (Network ID) and the last two octets identify the host (Host ID). In this case 129. For the Network+ exam. An example of a Class B IP address would be 129. The leading bits in the binary representation of a Class C address are always 11 (11000000).194. The first octet of a Class C address is always a number between 192-223. the first octet on the left is always part of the Network ID and the last octet on the right is always part of the Host ID. The leading bit in the binary representation of a Class B address is always 1 (10000000). 203 . Class C Addresses These are the most common and are used for smaller networks. There are five common classes: A through E. Inc.39. The class can be determined by the value of the first octet.8 and the Host ID would be 194. The octet(s) on the left represents the Network ID (Network ID) and the octet(s) on the right represents the Host ID (Host ID).39. The first octet (33) would identify the network (Network ID) and the rest of the octets would identify the host (Host ID) 39. The leading bit in the binary representation of a Class A address is always 0 (00000000).8.8.8.39. Depending on the assignment.

1) Class A . with the least number of Network IDs.534 possible Host ID numbers. Class B IP addresses are all in use and no longer available. 204 Specialized Solutions. Likewise. Class C uses three octets for the Network ID and only one for the Host ID. Class C IP addresses are still available. you must petition the official Internet authorities for the assignment of a network address. . there are some IP addresses that are reserved for special purposes: Addresses that begin with 127 and 224 through 255 are used for testing purposes and for multicasting and are not available for normal host addresses. so there are only 254 addresses available for hosts.0. As we mentioned earlier. Use the following table to memorize the different classes: CLASS A CLASS B CLASS C 1 . there are 16.223 In addition.used for smaller networks that do not exceed 254 hosts. the Network ID of 127 designates the local node and allows that node to send a test packet to itself without generating network traffic. and they are responsible for the assignment and regulation of IP addresses.126 128 . specifically 127. Class C has a large number of Network IDs and only a few Host IDs. B or C address. Some IP Addresses are reserved for special purposes: If: All Zeros All Ones 127 Network ID This Network All Networks Local Node Host ID This Node All Nodes IP Address Default Route for RIP Broadcast It is important for the networking professional to be able to identify whether an IP address is a Class A. Also.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Since a Class A Network ID uses the remaining three octets to assign numbers for the Host ID. Note: The existing shortage of addresses has made it impossible to obtain a Class A address for a long time. Class B . there are only 65.214 possible Host ID numbers. This organization is called InterNIC (Internet Network Information Center).191 192 .used for medium-sized networks.used by very large networks. if a network is going to be connected to the Internet.777.0. Class C . Class B uses two octets for the Network ID and two octets for the Host ID. You can see that Class A has the largest number of hosts. This is the loopback address. Inc. (For example. All in use and no longer available.

net. It does. IPv6 (IP Next Generation) IPv6 (IP Next Generation) is the latest IP technology. An example of IPv6 is as follows: AAAA:BBBB:0000:0000:0000:0081:FFFF:DDDD A shorthand version of the previous IPv6 address: AAAA:BBBB:0:0:0:81:FFFF:DDDD Leading zeros can be taken out. The address types are Unicast. It would make it unclear as to what was represented. use the double colon more than once in an IPv6 address. A double colon can be used to represent multiple contiguous fields of zeros. Rather than having “classes” like IPv4. which only uses 32-bit addressing. IPv6 uses hexadecimal numbers (0 to 9. Inc. however. For example.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Contact InterNIC at: Network Solutions InterNIC Registration Services 505 Huntmar Park Drive Herndon. to define the address type. and Multicast. however. You can compact multiple fields of zero beyond the previous example. IPv6 uses format prefixes (FP). VA 22070 You can also E-mail to hostmaster@internic. 205 . as compared to IPv4. demand high bandwidth. It uses eight 16-bit pieces with colons as separators as opposed to the full stops used in IPv4. but at least one must be left in each 16-bit field. The benefits of IPv6 include improved scalability. Unicast is an address for a single host. Anycast. then A to F) instead of decimal because of the length of the new addressing scheme. Here is an example of a Unicast address: 1070:0:0:0:7:777:300F:754B Specialized Solutions. as well as ease of configuration and security built right in. which are variable-length fields that comprise the high-order bits. This happens to supercede the rule about one zero having to be left in a field. It uses 128-bit addressing. the following address 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0005 can be represented in their compacted form by :: ::5 You cannot.

IPv4-compatible IPv6 addresses have zeros in the section beyond the normal IPv4 32-bit address (0:0:0:0:0:0:A:B:C:D or ::A:B:C:D) Anycast is an address for a set of interfaces that typically belong to different hosts and is delivered to the closest one. Link-local address and IPv4-compatible address. is an address for a group of hosts within a scope and has a FF00::/8 prefix. which replaces broadcast. 206 Specialized Solutions.0. The Loopback address in IPv6 is 0:0:0:0:0:0:0:1 or ::1. Multicast. An aggregatable global address uses a fixed prefix of 2000::/3. IPv6 allows for a multitude of IP address possibilities for the future of networking. A Site-local address uses the prefix FEC0::/10 and can be regarded as private addresses. Inc. . Link-Local addresses use the FE80::/10 prefix and are used by hosts on a local link. Site-local address. just like 127.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Unicast addresses can be broken down further into four sub-groups: Global aggregatable address. Finally. All in all.1 with IPv4.0. since they can be used to limit traffic to a domain.

255. a router can determine which addresses are local and which addresses are for other subnets within the network. Subnet masks with full octets (255) are the default subnet mask. You can use a subnet mask that does not completely use all the bits in an octet. or 225. only the traffic that is not local will pass through. lets look at subnet masks.0. 255. The number of 0s determines the maximum number of available hosts within the sub-network.11111111. This is done with binary addition (anding).0 In regard to classful addressing . By using a concept called anding. A subnet mask is an IP address (dotted-decimal number) in which all ones represent the network portion of the IP address and all zeros represent the host portion of the IP address. The purpose of a subnet mask is to determine the network portion of the IP address. By using subnets. Before looking at anding.255. Specialized Solutions.00000000. For example. Default Subnet Masks 255.255.0 (Class B). If you “and” the IP address to the subnet mask.00000000 or 255. a large university may have a network spread over several buildings and perhaps remote campuses. Since a router connects each subnet. the results will be the actual network portion of that IP address (not necessarily the default network portion determined by its class).0.0.255.0. you can reduce the overall network traffic.0 255.216 hosts) Class B (65. all the traffic within a building or campus will be kept locally except when it needs to go to another subnet.0. which uses a certain logic to determine the network portion of the address.0 (Class C). You must however. have all 1s to the left and all 0s to the right.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Subnetting Subnetting is the process of creating more than one private network from one public network address by customizing your subnet mask.0 255. 207 .255. a subnet mask can be 255.0 (Class A).534 hosts) Class C (254 hosts) Note: You cannot use IP addresses with all 1s or all 0s.255.777.0.0. Anding is the binary addition that the router uses to make this determination. In this example. Inc.255. For example: 11111111. separating it from the host portion of the address.0 Class A (16.

00100001.00100111. Therefore in our example the Network ID is 33. while the Host ID 0.11000010 (33.8. The following tables summarize IP addresses and subnet masks: 208 Specialized Solutions. By using this method.0. Any local addresses will not pass through.00000000 (255.224. it recognizes the first 11 bits as the network portion of this address. let’s and it to the subnet mask of 255.0.194 is determined by the zeros in the subnet mask. for binary addition: 1+1=1 1+0=0 0+0=0 Now.194. . Since the subnet mask only goes 3 bits into the second octet.32.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Remember. using our previous example of 33.32.11100000.00001000.194) 11111111.194.32 and the Host ID is 7.8.0.39. thus reducing the traffic on the rest of the network. Those 11 bits equal a network portion of 33.0) Noticing that all the places that have ones.00000000.00100000.0) equals 00100001. It is common in TCP/IP to omit the trailing octets in the Network ID and the leading octets in the Host ID.194.0.32.224.00000000.8. The network and host portions do not break down neatly into octets since the subnet mask does not take up a complete second octet.7. Inc.0. The remaining 21 bits in the IP address is the host portion This equals 7. a router can determine if a message is for a destination on the local network or for a machine on a remote segment.39.00000000 (33.0.8. and through leaving only the digits for the network portion or 33.8.

a.255.a.0 255.255.0 255.c Default Subnet Mask 255.a.b.c to 191. A unique host ID is required for each TCP/IP computer network interface card.b. Inc. A unique network ID is required for each subnet and each wide area network.0.b. • • • • Connect physically remote local networks.0 Maximum Networks and Hosts per Class Class A B C Default Subnet Mask 255.0 Number of Networks 126 16.255.255.534 254 How to Subdivide a Network The process of subdividing a network into logical units is called subnetting or subnetworking.255. it will require an address for each subnet.a.384 2.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Default Subnet Mask and Network Classes Class A B C IP Address 001.b. Reduce network traffic by limiting broadcast and local traffic to a single segment. Specialized Solutions.0.b.0.216 65. 209 .255.c to 223.0.777.a. Allows an unlimited number of hosts to communicate.a.c 128.0. There are several reasons to divide a network in this manner. each TCP/IP printer network interface and each router interface on each subnet.0 255.0. If a router is connected to two subnets.097. There are steps to follow when subnetting: Determine the number of Network IDs required.0 255. Connect a mix of network technologies (Ethernet and Token Ring).c to 126.b.152 Number of Hosts 16. Be sure to include some room for growth of the network. Determine the number of Host IDs per subnet.c 192.

382 Hosts N/A 8190 4096 2046 1022 510 254 126 62 30 14 6 2 210 Specialized Solutions.255.255.255.192.0 255. Inc.255.254.000 hosts.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Define the Subnet Mask The goal is to define one subnet mask for the entire internetwork that gives the desired number of subnets and allows enough hosts per subnet.224 255.255.255.255.0 255.128 255.0.255.255.255.252 Bits 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Subnets 0 6 14 30 62 126 254 510 1022 2046 4096 8190 16.255.0 255. you will need to start with the network ID supplied by InterNIC.248 255.255. .252. we are increasing the number of network addresses that we can use and decreasing the number of host. The following table shows the subnet mask created by borrowing bits and how it will affect our network. Class B Subnet Mask (2 to 14 bits borrowed) 255. we have one network with approximately 65.240. We do this by using bits from the next octet or octets as part of our network addresses that we assign.0 255.224.255.36. You should remember the formula 2n-2 where n is the number of bits borrowed. First.255.255. We will use an InterNIC ID of 191.0 255.0 255. As we begin to subnet.0. To begin this process.255.192 255.255. With this number. We use this formula to determine the number of subnets that will be created by borrowing bits from the hosts.255.0 255.255.240 255. we will notice that this is a Class B network and therefore the default subnet mask will be 255.248.255.255.

248 255. 1.255. Specialized Solutions. Just to be on the safe side. 211 .Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Class C Subnet Mask (2 to 6 bits borrowed) 255. Inc.224 255. Enter the value of 18. we determine that we will need 14 subnets to meet our current needs. Now we get out our Windows calculator.255.255. you can use the scientific calculator supplied with any Windows operating system.255. Make sure that it is in scientific view (that’s the big calculator).255. the question is how many bits of the third octet do we need to use? After examining our network requirements.252 Bits 2 3 4 5 6 Subnets 0 6 14 30 62 Hosts N/A 30 14 6 2 To make this easy. lets keep our network ID of 191.240 255. 3.255. let’s add 4 more for future expansions. The number 18 will now be in binary (10010). We already know that the first two octets will be 10111111 00100100 from this ID.255.192 255. 2.255.255.36 as assigned to us by InterNIC. For this example. Change the mode to binary (Bin).255. Make sure that the decimal mode (Dec) is selected. giving us a total requirement of 18.

our answer would have been to use 4 bits and we would have been limited to a maximum of 14 subnets.248.0. For this example. .224. Also notice that had we chosen 14 (no allowance for growth).255. instead of selecting the next subnet on our list. the subnet mask would be 255.0 and the network address of 192. The following table shows the six subnets created when using the three bits of the third octet: 212 Specialized Solutions.255. you can determine the available Network IDs.36.000 hosts each. we would have had to reconfigure the entire network.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 4. Inc. To keep things simple. This will actually allow us up to 30 subnets with 2. let’s look at the subnets for the subnet mask of 255. Count the number of binary digits (5). Had we needed to add a new subnet. Determine the Network IDs One you determine the number of subnets required and the subnet mask. This will be the number of bits required for the third octet.

36.0 and the default Class C subnet mask would be 255.36.0.) Specialized Solutions.36. In dotted-decimal format. and continues up to one less than the subnet ID of the next subnet. up to and including the remaining digits not used with the subnet ID. The only restrictions are that you cannot use .36. 213 . the sending computer will send the message to a router for delivery.000 or .0.128 192.255. This indicates that the Network ID is located in the first octet of the network address.001 in the last octet.36 (overall network address) 192. For example.255.64 192.255. (If the sending computer and the destination computer have the same subnet mask. these are reserved for broadcast addresses.0. this means that the number starts with .Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Subnets (Subnet Mask 11111111 11111111 111) Binary Network ID 11000000 00100100 11000000 00100100 001 11000000 00100100 010 11000000 00100100 011 11000000 00100100 100 11000000 00100100 101 11000000 00100100 110 Dotted-decimal ID 192. Inc.255. or one that is located on a remote network. The zeros indicate the location of the Host ID.0.36.0. they are on the same network. on a Class A network the default subnet mask would be 255.32 192.36. A Class B network default subnet mask would be 255.192 Determine the Host IDs The host ID can be assigned as any number starting with the last digit of the forth octet (00000001). indicating that the Network ID is contained in the first two or three octets respectively.160 192. Summary of Subnets Subnet masks are used on TCP/IP networks to determine whether a message is for a computer that resides on the local network.96 192. The sending computer checks the octets of the destination address against its own to determine if the destination computer is on the local network or a remote network. If it is different.

Inc.255.223 214 Specialized Solutions.0.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide NETWORK CLASS CLASS A CLASS B CLASS C DEFAULT SUBNET MASK 255.0.255.0 255.191 192 .0 CLASS ID 1 .0 255. .0.126 128 .255.

you will need to type in the specified default gateway. right-click on TCP/IP Protocol. Only administrators who have detailed knowledge and experience working with the Registry should attempt to change the default TCP/IP parameters in Registry Editor. The appearance of these dialog boxes may vary depending on which operating system you are using. and click Properties. However. Click the radio button to enable DNS. Default Gateway Type the IP address of the gateway routers you have installed on your network. other TCP/IP settings may be established or changed by first clicking on the Network icon in the Control Settings window. Inc. you may specify a particular IP address. Next. and enter the information in the appropriate fields. Use the “New” and “Add” command buttons to add a new gateway to the list of installed gateways.” and the computer will capture one from the DHCP server. or click the radio button next to “Obtain an IP address automatically. in addition to other hardware and software configurations. IP Address Here. On some screens. DNS You can enable or disable DNS. Specialized Solutions. click the Protocols tab. Whichever one appears first on the list is considered the default gateway. This opens the TCP/IP Properties window and you can now click on the appropriate tab and enter your configuration information. 215 .Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials TCP/IP Configuration Concepts The Windows Registry database contains the TCP/IP configurations.

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is used on a TCP/IP network to send configuration data to clients. . Inc. and subnet mask configuration. 216 Specialized Solutions. This information includes the TCP/IP address configuration. It also includes the DNS configuration. default gateway. WINS maps NetBIOS names to IP addresses.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide WINS Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) is central to Microsoft’s networking topology.

Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. Keyword ARP BOOTP Class A IP Address Class B IP Address Class C IP Address Default Gateway DHCP DNS FTP HOSTS file HTTP HTTPS ICMP ICS IMAP4 IP IP Address LMHOSTS file NAT NetBIOS Octet Definition Specialized Solutions. Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. 217 . Inc.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Keyword POP3 Port Number Proxy Server SMTP SNMP Subnet Mask Subnetting TCP UDP WINS Definition 218 Specialized Solutions. . Inc.

219 . What is the purpose of DNS? 5. What is the value of the leading bit (one on the far left) for a Class A IP address? Class B? Class C? 11.Chapter 8 – TCP/IP Essentials Review Questions Chapter 8 1. Who is responsible for maintaining top-level domains? 8. What is a domain? 7. How many primary protocols are used to make the TCP/IP Suite? 3. What are the four layers that make up the TCP/IP protocol suite? 2. What are five reasons to use subnetting? Specialized Solutions. Name three of the five other protocols used within TCP/IP. IPv4 addresses consist of a ______ bit number. 10. What is an FQDN and give an example? 6. 4. Inc. Which of the name resolution services will work only in Windows? 9. 12. Subnetting is the process of breaking an IP address into _________ and ________ groups.

Inc. .Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 220 Specialized Solutions.

The following are several SNMP managers: Hewlett-Packard Open View IBM NetView InterMapper (Macintosh) MRTG (Multi Router Traffic Grapher – UNIX) NetMinder Sun Net Manager SNMP utilizes three elements for the complete system: The management system software The agent software Communities Management Software This is the primary software package that is used by the administrator. The data is then compiled in a database called a MIB (Management Information Base). Network Managers . In addition.SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an open protocol that allows third party software vendors to create products to manage networks. you can remotely monitor any SNMP compatible device. Inc. From the database and the software interface.Chapter 9 – TCP/IP Utilities Chapter 9 – TCP/IP Utilities One of the advantages of using TCP/IP as your network protocol is that it comes with several utilities that you can use to validate and troubleshoot the network. 221 . the administrator can create reports and charts that define the status of the network. you can obtain several third party software packages that will help you manage a network. Specialized Solutions. Using one of these products. It is run on a single computer and is used to access any SNMP devices and collect data.

. 222 Specialized Solutions. It will respond to commands issued by the management software. This command will capture any errors and problems that occur on the agent device and send it to the manager. The three commands are: Get: request data from the device. Communities Communities are logical groups consisting of at least one manager and agent (usually several agents are assigned to one manager). Inc. Validation Tools TCP/IP provides several command-level tools that can be used to validate various parameters within a network. Get-next: request the next value in a sequence. Set: sends a configuration value to a device.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Agent Software The agent software resides on the SNMP compliant device. therefore providing a level of security. A community can also restrict access. These commands can be entered from a DOS prompt. An additional SNMP command is the trap. The value of using communities is to limit the number of managers and agents.

and normal (i). Netstat -a shows all connections and listening ports. Netstat -e shows Ethernet statistics. Nbtstat -R both purges and reloads the remote name cache table. Netstat -r shows the content of the routing table. ROUTE The ROUTE command will show you the routing table and allow you to make edits to it. but did not cause a stop. NBTSTAT This command will display NetBIOS over TCP/IP statistics. TRACERT. Inc. TRACERT A Trace Route command-line utility. Nbtstat -c provides the remote name cache with the IP addresses. Nbtstat -n provides local NetBIOS names. NETSTAT This command will display all the TCP/IP protocol statistics. Netstat -s shows statistics on a per-protocol basis. serious (!). This includes critical system errors. Note in the graphic below that an icon indicates that the event is critical (a stop occurred). Specialized Solutions. Nbtstat -r provides names resolved by both broadcast and the WINS service.Chapter 9 – TCP/IP Utilities Event Viewer Event Viewer is a Windows utility that will allow you to log any events and errors. and TCP/IP events and errors. 223 . shows every router interface that a TCP/IP packet passes through on its way to its destination.

and typing in either cmd or command. . Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Hint: Use these line commands by clicking the Start button in your taskbar. clicking Run. 224 Specialized Solutions.

Ping works at the IP level. NSLOOKUP -s lists well-known services of clients in the domain. IPCONFIG is entered from a DOS prompt and WINIPCFG can be used from RUN on the START menu. NSLOOKUP -h shows CPU and operating system information for the domain. Ping -t performs a continuous ping and ping -n pings the IP address more than once.12. IPCONFIG/WINIPCFG These commands are the same. You should use this command when you want to verify a user’s configuration or if there are problems reaching a remote host. NSLOOKUP a shows aliases of clients in the domain. and will often respond even when higher-level TCP-based services cannot. PING The lowest level test to find out if you have connectivity to a remote host. NSLOOKUP This command is used to troubleshoot DNS problems and can display the DNS entry for a given IP address.168. RARP RARP accomplishes the reverse of the ARP by using the known MAC address to find a host’s IP address. Specialized Solutions. which might be 0000-05-67-FF-33. NSLOOKUP -t shows all records of the type specified. NSLOOKUP -d shows all records for the domain.Chapter 9 – TCP/IP Utilities TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS TCP/IP also provides several useful troubleshooting tools. and you would use this IP to find its MAC address or its physical address.1. Arp -s is used to change the IP address of a device. Arp -a displays the current ARP entries (resolved IP to MAC addresses) on your client. and will display the current configuration of a computer. IFCONFIG IFCONFIG displays the status of the network interface configuration. 225 . ARP ARP will allow you to find the physical address (MAC address) of a computer by using the IP address of that computer. Inc. The following three are the most common and are covered in more detail in the next chapter. For example. the IP of a host might be 192.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 226 Specialized Solutions. . Inc.

Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. Inc. Keyword ARP Event Viewer IFCONFIG IPCONFIG Management Software NBTSTAT NETSTAT NSLOOKUP PING RARP SNMP TRACERT Definition Specialized Solutions.Chapter 9 – TCP/IP Utilities KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. 227 .

each device will need to be _________ compliant. In order for your new network management software to monitor the activities of the entire network. List as many as you can. . TCP/IP provides several tools that you can use to validate statistics of your network. Inc.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 9 1. What kind of software package can you purchase to help analyze your network? 2. You are the manager of a large network and have been getting complaints about the system being slow. 228 Specialized Solutions. 3.

from wandering into unprotected areas and inadvertently corrupting or deleting files. User and Share Level Users will have different levels of access. Limiting access via passwords can prevent an inexperienced user. or anyone who has access to your network for that matter. Inc. motivated by curiosity. Specialized Solutions. data encryption. or at least have your plan intact. Users should be held accountable for the security of their individual workstations. Password practices and procedures. There are a number of reasons for maintaining a secure network.Chapter 10 – Network Security Chapter 10 – Network Security Security is a vital aspect of a network that cannot be ignored. such as setting up E-mail addresses and initial passwords. anyone can get into any file and do anything to it they want to do. or an irresponsible prank. Most network security breaches are the work of someone from inside the company. the network administrator has complete responsibility for anything that happens to the network. of dollars. she must develop a plan that will meet the needs of her particular network. Therefore. Although corrupting and deleting files accidentally can cause serious problems. and firewalls are critical parts of your network. can deliberately damage your network. The best time to set up your network security. All users will have access to the network and to their own files (documents they themselves have created). as well as the levels of permission necessary for these individuals to do their jobs. Most users will also be able to access shared files. Once a company’s files have been set up for maximum access. Whether the sabotage is malicious. A good plan will include the following considerations: • • • • Size of network Scope of network Type and amount of usage of the network Who will have access to what User-level Security All employees should be assigned user names and passwords. Very few users will have access to administrative features. creating chaos and costing thousands. you must also be prepared for the possibility of malicious intent. or even millions. the results can be devastating. is right up front. unless safeguards are built in. A disgruntled employee. As you might have already deduced. before you set up the network. depending on the roles they play in your company. Select a basic security model that will meet the needs of your network and customize it as your needs change. 229 .

passwords are assigned to network resources rather than to users. authentication confirms that messages received truly originated from their stated source. A roadmap of all user names and passwords should be kept in a secure place. while the original file remains intact. . the user will be inclined to be less attentive to personal security.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Privacy and confidentiality are important to most users. If the user is not able to trust that the documents he or she creates are safe from outside access. should the administrator be unavailable at a time when administrator access is required. They can then copy the file to a local drive or a personal folder on the server. where the administrator can easily retrieve it. and cultivates a conscientious attitude toward security. Password protection is. User Logon Share-level Security With the share-level security model. Users can access a shared resource. The user can edit the file as necessary. User-level security requires the user to logon using a Username and password. A verification method called “authentication” verifies the identity of a person or process. 230 Specialized Solutions. such as a template or another type of file. Inc. among other things. the file can be accessed by anyone who has the password and knows how to use it to access the shared resource. It creates an atmosphere of confidentiality. a gesture of respect for the user and the system. The systems administrator should have an assistant or backup person who will have total access to the system. However. In a manner similar to the signature on a document. Information on the shared drive cannot be changed by anyone other than the person who created the file.

Inc.Chapter 10 – Network Security Password Security Specialized Solutions. 231 .

For example. you will most likely be using E-mail. Some firewalls will only allow E-mail to pass through. and your company’s files and directories will be safe and available when you need them. Some will be more suitable to your system than others. Firewall Blocking Port Numbers You can block port numbers for security purposes on your firewall or router so as to allow only specific traffic into your network. If you are accessing the Internet from your network. at the very least. they can be host-based. and work at the application level. you will be responsible for choosing the type of firewall that best meets your network’s needs.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Security Techniques There are a number of techniques and practices that will enhance the security of your network. As the system administrator. . 232 Specialized Solutions. but they are not particularly effective if your goal is to protect trade secrets or other types of proprietary information. you would block port 80. A firewall will need to be part of your security plan in order to prevent unauthorized access from outside of your network. This needs to be handled in such a way that production will not be interrupted. Files need to be backed up daily. or they can be configured to suit your specific security needs. and even more often on larger networks. or auditing. if you wanted to block Internet traffic from entering your intranet. Firewalls can trace calls and locate the computer trying to break in. Firewalls A firewall is designed to prevent access to your network from outside the company. Your security needs will determine which techniques will best meet your system’s needs. It is an important part of a network security plan. by forwarding application traffic through the firewall. Gateway hosts (also called bastion hosts) create fortified areas in the network’s security perimeter. They can permit or deny traffic at a certain level. Backing up Data Another integral part of network security is your backup system. Protocol-specific application proxy firewalls may provide increased access control. Inc.

so if one goes down the other can maintain network operations. Remember. you know how important a backup plan is to the safety of your network’s data. If anything happens to one. Specialized Solutions. called the backup medium. those who fail to plan. Nothing will save you time and stress like an effective and thorough backup strategy in case the worst happens and your system crashes. offer server equipment with multiple hard drives that mirror each other. Although slower than RAID. for performing and storing data backups: Removable Disks There are two categories of removable disks: Small-Capacity and Large-Capacity. and the procedure to follow for recovery. Large-capacity disks include such options as the removable optical disk. your plan will need to include information about who will be in charge of performing the backups. Another more common form of backup is to a tape drive. the other can take over without compromising network operations. rather than one larger server. As you might guess. It also has large capacities of up to 50 GB for some systems. range from 1. Ideally. These multiple disks are called disk arrays. Most file server manufacturers recognize the need for data redundancy and thus. Floppy disk capacities today. In addition. and are more commonly known as RAID. the second server should serve as a backup to the first. and how often backups will be performed. how the backup information will be tested. the small-capacity category includes the floppy disk. The tape backup method is inexpensive and simple to implement. There are several options available. which uses laser technology to read and write information onto a removable disk that has capacities of 128 MB to 650 MBs. where you will keep the backup information (on-site or off-site). As a computer professional. Tape Backup This is probably the oldest and most popular backup medium in use today. it is still a viable option. 233 . you must answer important questions about what to backup. This backup medium is suitable for small companies. Backup Options Before we discuss the different RAID fault tolerance strategies. Inc.Chapter 10 – Network Security It may make more sense to have two medium-sized servers. plan to fail. so make sure not to neglect this important part of network security. While planning your backup strategy.44 MB for the standard floppy disk to up to 250 MB capacities for ZIP disks. let’s discuss the various backup methods that are available.

234 Specialized Solutions. as its name implies. but usually these won’t have the features available on a third-party backup program. Differential. A volume can be part of a disk or an entire disk. despite the presence of hardware or software failures. . both the last differential backup tape copy and the last full backup tape copies will need to be used. the last full backup and all of the incremental backup tapes will be needed. is called fault tolerance.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Back It Up Backup Software Software programs or utilities are available that make backing up data easier and more efficient. The Differential backup is used for backing up only the files that have changed since the last full backup. and Incremental Backups There are three backup types available: Full. This usually involves some degree of redundancy. The Incremental backup is used for daily backups. This method also uses an archive bit to identify which files have changed. as only the data that has changed since the last backup will be copied. When recovering from a failure. Differential and Incremental. Inc. This will reduce the amount of time needed to perform backups to the server. but will be the easiest to restore. Most operating systems come with a backup utility. It is a named portion or chunk of disk space. will backup all selected data on the network. and utilizes different means of dealing with security issues at this level. Volumes Volumes are a way to organize storage disks so that the network operating system can store data on a disk. This method will take the largest amount of storage media. To restore. An archive bit is used to identify the files that have changed. This type of backup is usually performed weekly. The Full backup. Full. Fault Tolerance and RAID The ability of a system or component to continue normal operations..

With this method. (Provides no fault tolerance.Striped array with rotating parity (disk striping with parity) NOTE: The acronym for RAID has also been referred to as: “Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks. administrators are alerted when one disk fails so that they can “regenerate” the RAID set before another disk has a chance to fail. Disk Striping With Parity (RAID 5) The most common of RAID strategies. However.) Disk Mirroring (RAID 1) Disk mirroring or disk duplexing involves using one or more mirrors of a hard disk. which provides for even more fault tolerance. this one uses the parity method of ensuring that the data stored is really the same data that was sent. including Novell NetWare. however. This technique may be applied in either software or hardware. support either disk mirroring or disk duplexing. a copy of the data is spread across all of the disks based on a mathematical formula such that any one disk in the set can be lost and the other disks will have a copy of all of the information that it contained.Mirrored arrays (disk mirroring) RAID 2 . Several operating systems. If more than one disk is lost.Parallel array with ECC (disk striping with ECC) RAID 3 . 235 . the data in the stripe set is lost and cannot be retrieved.Non-redundant striped array (disk striping) RAID 1 .” Disk Striping (RAID 0) The segmentation of logically sequential data. this relatively inexpensive technique can be very useful. Inc.Parallel array with parity (disk striping with ECC stored as parity) RAID 4 . so that segments can be written to multiple disk drives (or other physical devices) in a round-robin fashion is called disk striping. RAID 6 and Beyond RAID-6 includes a second disk striping with parity scheme. If your processor is capable of reading or writing data faster than a single disk can keep up. This. The same data is written to two separate hard disks in order to preserve the data in the event of a device failure. then the data in the entire array is also lost. if anything happens to one of the drives. such as a single file.Striped array with parity (disk striping with large blocks) RAID 5 . Typically. and is a standard feature of RAID systems. is not being used commercially at the moment to an Specialized Solutions.Chapter 10 – Network Security The following are common RAID (Redundant Array of Independent Disks) specifications: RAID 0 .

as you might guess. It also has a bare-bones OS (microkernel) for processing I/O requests. surges. which allows for better performance. Storage Area Network (SAN) A SAN (Storage Area Network) is a back-end network connecting storage devices (generally by using SCSI). . and sags in the power supply. is like RAID-10.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide large degree. are power strips that provide protection from voltage spikes. it offers better performance. and guaranteed to provide power to a computer in the event of interruptions in the incoming electrical power. since it is not dependent on another computer. Fault Tolerance and Power You need to protect your network from data loss due to power surges and failures. also called surge suppressors. In this case. Cost. Like RAID-10. but it is treated just like any node on the network and is subject to all the positives and negatives of that identity. such as battery time remaining. SANs are channel attached whereas NASs are network attached. RAID-53. and each type provides power for a different length of time. but at a greater cost. RAID-10 is comprised of an array of stripes (each stripe equals a RAID1 array). but uses a striping scheme where each stripe is a RAID-3 array of disks. RAID 7 offers a real-time operating system and the functionality of a standalone computer. The equipment described below is among the best available: UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) A UPS is battery powered. Inc. A SAN can either be centralized or decentralized. These types of RAID are not as commonly used and are not as likely to be on the test. It is assigned an IP address and it is attached to a LAN. Surge Protectors Surge Protectors. A centralized SAN generally ties many hosts together into one storage system. SAN traditionally have been used for the purposes of archiving data that is needed but infrequently used. An Interactive UPS (also called an “intelligent UPS”) connects to the computer's serial port and provides information. A RAID system is the most common example of a centralized SAN. the best tools seem to be the more expensive ones. 236 Specialized Solutions. A decentralized SAN connects multiple hosts with many storage systems. Network-Attached Storage Network-attached storage (NAS) is hard disk storage (RAID) like SAN. There are different types of UPS devices. There are several tools on the market that will help prevent data loss from power fluctuations. allowing the computer to shut down before complete loss of power. is an issue. It functions faster.

In order for this policy to be effective. Users working with sensitive information such as budgets. personnel records and other confidential data should change their passwords at least every 30 days. Some “classified” networks require password changes every day. and numbers. Specialized Solutions. management must randomly check to make sure that the policy is being applied. 237 . so why make them available by not cleaning off your electronic desktop when you leave your workspace? Many large companies implement a “clean desk policy. symbols. numbers and symbols. he or she will know how to accomplish the task. but are easy enough that users can remember them. but most networks can get by with changing their passwords every 30 days. no matter who they are. This is known as a security audit. etc. The importance of users logging off and locking their workstations when they are not physically using them cannot be stressed enough. So. The most effective passwords are ones that are the maximum number of characters and use a combination of letters. Inc. and discourages them from wandering into unauthorized areas. Policies that spell out password procedures should be given to all users so they will know what is expected of them. Evaluate your security policy on a regular basis to ensure that it is up to speed. There is no reason for anyone other than the user to access the user’s files. and troubleshoot before the trouble starts. If the network administrator needs to use the workstation. should be given the opportunity to look through another person’s desk while they are not there. No one. an effective password policy is one in which passwords change on a regular basis.Chapter 10 – Network Security Password Practices and Procedures A network administrator may encrypt password information that is automatically sent to the server when users log on to the network. This holds users accountable for their actions on the network. include characters. Password security is compromised if a user writes his or her password down where it might be seen by others. Passwords should be changed more frequently in high-security networks. away.” What this means is that if the employees leave their workstations (for any reason) they are required to clean off their desks or workstations and lock documents.

because the sender and receiver use the same key to decrypt the data. . The recipient’s public key is used by the sender to encrypt the message. other than the person for whom the message was intended. and is used extensively for online commerce (e-commerce) and online banking. It was invented in 1977 by Ron Rivest. and the recipient’s private key is used to decrypt it. A VPN is a network that uses the Internet to connect remote users to an internal network. Encryption is also used to encrypt E-mail transmissions. Without encryption the Internet would be a hotbed for high-tech thieves who could tap into it and steal information and credit card numbers. Inc. the Internet is not the most secure of environments.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Encryption Data can be encoded at the sender’s end and decoded at the recipient’s end so that no one. This practice is called cryptography and the system is called a cryptosystem. Adi Shamir. The name comes from their first initials. It is also used to secure data over VPNs (Virtual Private Networks). DES was developed by IBM and is now the most commonly used Private Key encryption system used. Even with encryption. and Leonard Adleman. These keys are numbers or strings of characters combined with the original text to create an algorithm. 238 Specialized Solutions. can understand the message. Encryption is used to scramble passwords on an internal network so that they may not be stolen during logon. DES (Data Encryption Standard) is the fastest and easiest method of sending an encrypted message. The entire security of RSA depends on the difficulty of factoring large prime numbers. RSA (Rivest-Shamir-Adleman) uses both a public key and a private key. Encryption converts regular text into ciphertext by combining the original data with one or more “keys” known only to the sender and recipient. This method uses a 56-bit private key. RSA is a public-key cryptosystem for both encryption and authentication.

Many viruses are simple annoyances. Most viruses are written by hackers who are trying to show off. but some of them can cause irreparable harm to files. EES (Escrowed Encryption Standard) is known as skipjack and uses an 80-bit key. They will write themselves into memory any time the computer is booted.000 known viruses. With this method of encryption both parties have the same key. and bulletin boards. it is imperative that all possible disaster scenarios be addressed. so as to allow the business or organization to quickly resume their activities. Skipjack was originally designed to be integrated onto a chip known as a clipper chip. but they are less secure. Inc. will ensure a much quicker recovery. which is used to encrypt data and to decrypt it. Ensuring the integrity of your network infrastructure to the best of your ability. Since the financial impact on a business can be severe if even down for an hour. It is similar to DES. but the use of the 80-bit key makes it much more complex. There are four basic types of viruses: File Infectors: These attach themselves to executable files and spread to other files when the program is run. As the name implies. The sender encrypts the message using a public key and the receiver decrypts it using a private key. Viruses Viruses are those nasty little programs that can wreak havoc on a computer and its data. The sole purpose of a virus is to replicate and make life miserable for computer users. PGP (Pretty Good Privacy) is based on Public Key encryption and was developed to encrypt E-mail messages. which identifies and authenticates the sender and message data using public-key encryption. the message is encrypted using the original sender’s public key. Viruses can be spread by various sources including: shareware.Chapter 10 – Network Security Extra data appended to a message. is called a digital signature. 239 . It should keep the mission-critical functions first and foremost. files downloaded from the Internet. There are over 60. much less a day. The recipient of the response would then use their private key to decrypt the message. both on location and at backup sites. Disaster Recovery A disaster recovery plan (DRP) lays out how an organization or business is to deal with disasters. Boot Sector: These replace the master boot record (or boot sector on a floppy). Symmetric Keys can also be used. If the receiver wishes to respond. Specialized Solutions. Prevention should also be addressed in the plan. It is designed to offset or minimize the effect of a potential disaster on the business or organization. software from unknown origins. Public Key encryption uses the Diffie-Hellman algorithm and is a one-way type of encryption method. it is not a completely secure encryption method.

It used to be true that you couldn’t get a virus from opening a document. but when loaded. 240 Specialized Solutions. If the computer has a BIOS setting that allows you to disable boot-sector writes. Make sure it is compatible with all of the operating systems that you use. they will go to work on the system. With this in mind. Unfortunately while macros are very valuable. Inc. many viruses and macroviruses are transmitted over the Internet. just from running a program. especially if they come from sources other than a manufacturer’s Web site. Macro Virus: These attach themselves as executable code to documents and run when the document is opened.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Trojan Horses: These appear to be legitimate programs. enable it! This setting must be disabled before installing a new operating system. there are several measures you can take to prevent or at least minimize the damage: Purchase an antivirus program—there are several good ones on the market. Use extreme caution when you download files. Trust no one when it comes to loading programs on your machine. . Hundreds of viruses are written each month. they mean that when you open a document you are running a program. Unfortunately viruses have become a way of life in the computer world. Keep your anti-virus program updated. (They can also attach to some kinds of E-mail). (prevents applications from writing to the boot section of the hard disk). Be careful when reading floppies of unknown origin or using your disk on unfamiliar machines. These days. The most secure protection against Internet-distributed viruses is to make sure you have an antivirus program running at all times (or at least when you’re downloading and first running new files). Many viruses are transmitted by floppy disks.

241 .Chapter 10 – Network Security Specialized Solutions. Inc.

Keyword Data Encryption Differential Backup Disaster Recovery Disk Mirroring Disk Striping Firewall Full Backup Incremental Backup NAS Password Security RAID SAN Share Level Security User Level Security Volumes Definition 242 Specialized Solutions. . Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords. Inc.

In a share level model. passwords are assigned to __________. The acronym RAID stands for __________. What are the three common levels of RAID? 6.Chapter 10 – Network Security Review Questions Chapter 10 1. Inc. 243 . What is the function of a firewall? 4. 3. What purpose does encryption play in your security model? Specialized Solutions. 5. What are the two requirements of user level logon? 2.

Inc. .Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 244 Specialized Solutions.

The only tools required for this phase are a pad of paper. test the result. and good listening skills. It is proper use of all the parts that will make your next troubleshooting exercise easier. If fact. you will most likely be called when there is a problem. The majority of this course has focused on the facts and science of networks. This chapter will begin with some basic troubleshooting techniques. Specialized Solutions. For some technicians troubleshooting comes naturally. In most cases. while for others it is a struggle. This chapter will focus on the application of these facts to solve problems. They may not know the technical reason for the failure. Establish the symptoms: Defining a problem is not always as simple as it sounds. but they often hold the keys to the problem. computers never fail at a convenient time. you are looking for the cause. troubleshooting is more of an art form than a science.Conclusion Chapter 11 – Troubleshooting a Network Being a computer and network professional automatically implies that you are a troubleshooter. it seems well defined by the person who calls and complains! But is it really defined? Frequently the problem. After all. Let’s take a look at an eight-part approach that will lead to successful troubleshooting. troubleshooting comprises perhaps the single largest aspect of working with computer and network hardware and software. implement a solution. the operator doesn’t know what caused the problem. Remember. so that you can focus on the things that might be the cause of the problem. This added frustration often leads to confusion and stress. The user of the computer or network is your best source of information. recognize the potential effects of the solution and document the solution. establish what has changed. Don’t assume that just because you are the expert. Basic Troubleshooting As mentioned. identify the affected area. you must be able to quickly and confidently eliminate as many alternatives as possible. or when there is a deadline and the user must have it fixed now. “as reported. What you must learn is how to approach a problem in an organized and methodical manner. To make matters worse. The eight parts are as follows: establish the symptoms. select the most probable cause. and progress with some specific tools that you can employ to simplify the process. In order to do this. a habit of applying a methodical and determined approach will soon result in it becoming second nature for you. Remember. a pen (or pencil). 245 . Inc. if you are the expert. Be sure to listen carefully to your client or co-worker. As a troubleshooter. Troubleshooting is an art and can be learned. Being an effective troubleshooter does not come automatically with networking knowledge (even though it is implied). For those who must endure the struggle. not when all is well. The first step is the most critical and often the most ignored. not the symptom. Without a complete understanding of the problem (the entire problem) you can spend a great deal of time working on the symptoms instead of the cause.” is really just the symptom and not the true cause. They always fail in the middle of a job. you must be organized.

The only way to resolve these is to be able to re-create the set of circumstances that caused the failure. or help them focus on what was going on when the problem first occurred. This will take time and patience. and most importantly. If possible. screen changes. recent software upgrade. and when. With a little experience. Describe any changes in the computer (noise. There is no particular approach to follow and there is no substitute for experience. Be sure to observe the failure yourself. as well as the results. . but the operator was there before (and after) the problem started and may recall the events that led up to the failure. you have isolated the problem to the keyboard or its cabling. network or computer moved. You may. Sometimes. Isolating the problem is the art of eliminating what you know from what you don’t know.) Show me how to create the error. you will be able to identify the best questions for the situation. lights. however. Identify the affected area The next step involves the process of isolating the problem.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide you may know how the computer and network runs and can find the technical cause of the failure. and so forth). Inc. it is important to observe how it is created. If it is an operatorinduced problem. Ask a few questions to help identify the problem and list the events as they occurred before the failure. The user will need to keep detailed records of what is being done before. have to ask some specific questions to jog their memory. Establish what has changed The most difficult problems to isolate are the intermittent ones. For example. the process of elimination is all that you can do. Do not make the questions too technical. One thing that might 246 Specialized Solutions. These never seem to occur when you are present. if a keyboard is not working and you connect a known good keyboard to the computer and it works. have someone demonstrate the failure to you. You may want to create a form with these questions (and others specific to the situation) for taking notes: When did you first notice the problem? What has changed since the computer was last used? (New Software. do not intimidate the user. the failure occurs. The purpose is to narrow the search down to one or two general categories. Are you the only one having the problem? Did anyone else use this computer? The list of questions could go on forever. You will need to create your own list based on the situation. The best you can do is to eliminate any obvious problem and work toward the more complex.

Conclusion help in such cases is to tell the user to not do anything with the computer when the problem recurs. Write down your plan! The first step of any plan should be document and back up. but you cannot receive any E-mail. you can “see” other computers in the network neighborhood. Once a plan is created. It requires two simple steps. Be sure to refer to any assumptions you may have made. Jumping around and randomly trying things can often lead to more serious problems. then you need to further isolate the problem to determine which program is experiencing difficulty. Select the most probable cause Make a Plan and Follow it from Beginning to End Create a planned approach to isolate the problem based on your knowledge at this point. then you know for sure that the network is physically working. and move forward. create a new plan based on what you discovered with the previous plan. Document every action and its results. make a plan and follow it. but to call you. If you must make any assumptions. That way the “evidence” is not disturbed. Isolation of a problem requires a structured approach. If for example. Inc. the first step in isolation is to separate a network (hardware) problem from a workstation problem. it is important to follow it through. Starting from the top. write them down. 247 . You may have to refer back to them later. If the first plan is not successful (it won’t always be). For example. In the case of a network problem. is the problem occurring on more than one workstation or is it only on one? If you determine that the problem is only on one workstation and the cabling and network card are working properly. isolate the problem to: A WAN or LAN A segment of a LAN A workgroup or domain A server or workstation A workstation or user Specialized Solutions. Do not make any assumptions. but something must be wrong in the E-mail software or configuration. The general procedure for isolating network problems is to start globally and work to locally. Start with the most obvious or easiest solution to eliminate.

It is important to use another operator. as well as the one that is causing problems. This will keep you removed from the problem and eliminate the “it always works for the expert” syndrome. Here are a few suggestions for isolating the hardware/software from the operator: Have another operator perform the same task on their own workstation. Note: If the problem is software-oriented. Inc. either repair or replace the defect. the problem may be caused by the operator. Test the correction (make sure that the changes work).Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Once the search has been narrowed. be sure to record the “before” and “after” changes. start looking for specific hardware: Routers Hubs/Concentrator Cabling or Connections Adapters Software related problems could also be isolated to several causes: Protocols Authentications As often as not. Confirm that the operator is using standard operating procedures. Frustrated and confused operators can lead to further problems. no amount of training or instruction will solve a problem until that general fear is removed. To resolve these types of problems. and not the hardware or the system. For example. repair or replacement is usually all that is needed. you must do three things: Formulate a correction (write down what you think will resolve the problem). if the problem is software or configuration related. This means to have the operator duplicate the problem while you watch – do not tell them how. However. Implement the solution. Implement a solution After locating or at least narrowing the problem to a few possibilities. it may require some additional effort. In these situations. you must be careful as to how you resolve the problem while not alienating the operator. you must be very careful to treat the cause and not the symptoms. . In these cases. if an operator is afraid of computers in general. With hardware. Resolving operator-induced failures is more difficult than hardware induced failures. 248 Specialized Solutions.

Many troubleshooting and repair services operate on the fix and run principle. Recognize the potential effects of the solution Make sure that the fix did not create other problems. This means to document (in writing) the symptoms. or a follow up call just to make sure all is well. This is one way to build. there is no substitute for experience. 249 . Confirmation means to make sure that the problem no longer exists. Test the Result No repair is complete without confirmation that the job is done. you are wasting your time and should be working on the next problem. Ask the user to test the solution and confirm satisfaction. Inc. Specialized Solutions. You must look at every new problem as an opportunity to expand that experience. maintain. You have not done a professional job if the repair was completed at the expense of something else. and the repair. The basis for this policy is that once the system is running. Document the solution Finally. document the problem and the repair. Keeping a copy of the repair procedure in your technical library may come in handy in a year or two when the problem (or one like it) happens again. and share experience. Confirmation of the repair can save you a return trip to repeat the fix or to correct a problem that you created.Conclusion Now we want to separate the true professional from the amateur. the problem. The reality is that the time you spend after the repair can save repeat service calls and shorten the time-cycle for future service calls. Confirming the repair may include some form of feedback from the user. In troubleshooting.

Punch Down Tool 250 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Networking and Troubleshooting Tools Just like a good computer repair technician. Wire Crimper The wire crimper is a versatile tool that strips and cuts copper wire as well as crimping solderless terminals. Inc. They secure the connection between the wires and the block. Networking tools can be divided into two categories: hardware tools and software tools. Hardware Networking Tools Before we get into the tools that are designed specifically to troubleshoot and ensure the integrity of your network. let us quickly cover some tools used to setup the network cabling. Wire Crimper Punch Down Tool Punch down tools are used to “punch down” cabling to “blocks” in your wiring rack. The narrow nose with its serrated jaws is used for pulling or coiling wire. . a network troubleshooter will need a few tools to make the process of troubleshooting easier.

it is still possible to test for continuity. In a wire for example. Most multimeters have a “continuity” setting. An open conductor means that the cable is broken and the current will not flow from one end to the other. Network cabling is. Since it is made up of wires. Some meters will let you test for current as well. Inc. a pair of wires with probes (one black and one red). which will indicate a complete circuit by either a light or a sound. The Multimeter The name multimeter was derived from its ability to measure several different parameters. the circuit is broken. in principle. A bad cable will be either open or shorted. For example. If the test is negative (no light or noise). With it you can test various electronic components. the resistance reading will be infinity or maximum – meaning that no current is flowing. There are several tools we can use to check for open and shorted wires. but only low amounts (less than 10 amps). A shorted conductor means that the current is flowing to ground or another cable instead of being isolated. Specialized Solutions. and continuity. as well as the electrical power in the computer. the resistance reading for continuity would be zero – meaning that current is flowing without resistance. All you need to do is use the resistance setting and test the device. you can have only one of two problems. We will start by looking at a multimeter. They can check for continuity and how the pin outs line up. which is one of the most basic tools for electronic troubleshooting. Media Tester Media testers are usually devices used to test the cabling. These failures are like a water pipe that is broken (open) or has a leak (shorted). The red wire is the positive probe and the black wire is the negative or ground probe. 251 . and a switch for adjusting the range of settings to be measured. If the wire is broken. whether it be RJ-11 or RJ-45. You can test for AC and DC voltage. Most will consist of a digital or analog meter or display. The purpose of continuity testing is to confirm a complete electrical circuit. it is to check to see that a wire is not broken. When working with network cabling. a positive test (the light comes on or it makes a noise) means that the circuit is complete. A good cable will provide continuity or current flow from one end to the other. When you connect both leads of the meter to each end of the device you are testing. very easy to troubleshoot. These devices are generally used when you make your own cabling.Conclusion Hardware Troubleshooting Tools Hardware troubleshooting tools are used to confirm the integrity of the cabling. resistance. If your meter does not have a continuity setting. we will have to know how to test for continuity.

there are more often than not. thus locating the wires. and test at the other end. Telephone and phone wiring companies use two tools. this is not a problem. When the receiver is placed in close proximity to the wire that has the signal applied. This applies a signal on the wires. When used together. several pairs of wires at one end (the hub or patch panel). Inc. it will emit a tone. However. The tone locator is a receiver that is set to the frequency of the generator. these tools are often called a fox and a hound. The question then becomes which pair goes to which room? Solving these problems with continuity testing can take a long time unless you are just lucky. testing for continuity will require an additional wire. You can use a pair of wires (very common in network cables) and connect the two wires at one end.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Network Tester Tone Generator and Tone Locator A multimeter is a universal tool and almost any electrical or electronic technician should have one. to find pairs of wires in a bundle. However. 252 Specialized Solutions. . The tone generator is connected to the wires at the known location (the room with the outlet). if the cable is a hundred feet long and spans the length of a building. If both ends are in the same location. called tone generators and tone locators. The problem when using this tool for testing continuity of a network cable is the length of the cable.

If you are able to send a signal and have it return. Time Domain Reflectometer For those who are serious network troubleshooters. because they look just like patch cables but are not interchangeable. They will monitor network traffic. The transmit wire on one connector is connected to the receive wire on the other (and vice versa). A loopback cable is just what the name implies. also called packet sniffers.Conclusion Tone Generator Test Cables One method of isolating problems is to use a special cable to remove a workstation from a network and simulate that it is still connected. you will know that the network card and the protocol stack are functioning. 253 . It has the transmit and receive wires connected. Software analyzers. Any signal placed on the transmit wire will loopback to the receive wire. Many protocol analyzers will include a TDR as one of their functions. Specialized Solutions. Inc. Protocol Analyzer A protocol analyzer is used to monitor and analyze network traffic. It is a single-ended cable that connects to a network card. and therefore back to the network card. but is double-ended. These cables can be used to connect two computers into a single network eliminating any other network hardware. By calculating the time it takes a signal to travel the length of a cable and to be reflected back. there are advanced tools that may well be worth the time and investment. Two such cables are the hardware loopback and the crossover cable. A crossover cable is similar to a loopback. capture packets and generate reports. The Time-Domain Reflectometer (TDR) is used to find breaks and shorts in network cabling. the location of any break or short can be determined. are usually a PC with a special network card. Be careful when using a crossover cable.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Optical Tester Optical Testers or optical time domain reflectometers (OTDR) are essentially the same as a TDR. 254 Specialized Solutions. Inc. OTDRs also calculate the locations of breaks by the amount of time it takes for a signal to travel the length of the cable and back. but used for fiber optic cabling. .

Anything that breaks the integrity of the data on a network is a break of security. Therefore. Common mode failures are generated when one component of a LAN causes the entire LAN to fail. Common Mode Failures Loss of Data Network Security Violations (Insufficient Rights or Permissions) Reduced Bandwidth Specialized Solutions. You can’t access a resource unless the administrator of the network has allowed you to do so. The following table provides some generic troubleshooting concepts: Network Troubleshooting Situation A single workstation does not connect to the network. but can be caused by a disconnected cable. you will need to refer to the operating systems’ manuals for detailed troubleshooting procedures. Inc. Authentication Probable Cause Usually these are authentication errors. check to ensure all network cabling and connectors are intact. Some passwords are case-sensitive. due to either excessive traffic or a bottleneck. 255 . the network. If data transfers are incomplete or inaccurate. For some reason. and a stuck caps-lock key can cause errors. or a disk resource. the traffic is not moving. A common failure is for a user to be unable to logon. This is sometimes called a broadcast storm. Often these are caused by typos when entering user names and passwords. It could be the processor. An example would be a network card that begins to continually broadcast useless information and overloads the network. A bottleneck is any resource that limits the rate at which network traffic can be moved.Conclusion Maintaining and Troubleshooting Networks Maintaining and troubleshooting networks differs from operating system to operating system. Reduced bandwidth is just like a traffic jam.

tasks like backing up drives or moving large amounts of data can be done at night. As networks grow. so does the traffic. If slow loading persists even after defragmenting. the network slows down. deletes. check for memory bottlenecks. Traffic Overloads Unauthorized Software 256 Specialized Solutions. You must manage software distribution to ensure users are not loading non-licensed software and computer viruses onto the network drives. and moves information. . Inc. You must defragment the drive. When the amount of traffic exceeds the ability of the network to carry it.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Slow Loading of Programs and Files Fragmentation occurs when the operating system saves. These problems can be addressed by segmenting the network and scheduling non-critical work for after hours. For example.

1. The loopback address is 127. On a Macintosh system. PING the Loopback Address The next step is to use IPCONFIG to get details about your workstation. It also lets you know the time that it takes. PING. open the TCP/IP Control Panel to use these utilities. but looks better and includes the MAC address of the network adapter card.Conclusion Troubleshooting Scenarios The following summarizes some possible scenarios that you may encounter and how to provide a solution: Misbehaving Protocols You have just installed a new workstation and are unable to see any other workstations or servers on the network. This comes in handy if you need to see where exactly on your intranet or on the Internet your packet is going. If you are using TCP/IP. you will use it often. Inc. 257 .0. TRACERT allows you to trace the “hops’ (routers encountered) that a packet takes to its destination. Remember this address. Specialized Solutions. because as a network professional. and TRACERT commands to test the network. This will test the protocol stack in the computer. This command will give the same results as IPCONFIG from DOS. The first step is to PING the loopback address. These commands work from a command prompt. you can confirm your hardware and protocols by using the IPCONFIG. On a Windows 95/98 computer.0. you can use the WINIPCFG command from the RUN dialog box in the START menu.

or 2003 system. XP. Inc. 2000.6. WINIPCFG. If you are using Windows. .55. your dialog box will look like the following.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Notice that the IP address of this computer is 195. WINIPCFG You can now PING that address to determine if the network card and protocol stack for the computer are working properly. 258 Specialized Solutions.48. This command is only for Windows 9x and ME and will not work on a Windows NT.

they must be okay.Conclusion PING 195. you will be testing a larger portion of the network.55. Cable Problems Cabling problems are simple: either they work or they don’t. The biggest problem with them is that we often assume that since they worked yesterday. use the ipxping command. Poor connections and loose connectors cause most cable problems.48. the server. PING Found a Problem If you are unable to reach a host computer. With each step. If at any stage. or the computer you are PINGing is not using the TCP/IP protocol. you receive a message like the following. For the IPX/SPX networks. Inc.6 Continue the process by PINGing another workstation. then there is a problem with the protocol. Here are some suggestions when you suspect cable problems: Specialized Solutions. you have encountered a problem. Usually this means you have the wrong IP address. It could simply mean that it is not logged on to the network. 259 . and so on.

If present. If there is a sudden change in performance. . The actual function of each light will depend on the manufacturer and you may have to check the documentation that came with the card for details. the first thing to do is find out what has changed. Inc. Somewhere in the system is a table or database that provides the translations from number to name and vise versa. If these files are being used. That location is the DNS (Domain Name Server). they will let you know if the card is working and if it can access the network. You know that the IP connection is good because you can PING the IP address. you can be sure that the network is not being detected. suspect a loose or disconnected cable. we need to look at four limiting factors on performance. respectively. or hosts.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Any time a computer was moved and it suddenly stops responding to the network. Another place to look for name resolution problems (on a local LAN) is in the HOSTS and LMHOSTS files. Beyond that. These are text files that are used to statically map local and remote hostnames and NetBIOS names to IP addresses. These lights can be seen from the back of the computer. you will need to use a TCP/IP utility called “nslookup. If no lights are on. (which the computers like) and the other is the IP address name (which we humans like). they will indicate whether or not the card can detect the presence of a network and when data is being transmitted. have two names. In general.” With nslookup. Any new hardware or applications (including upgrades) are always good candidates for the problem. you can find them on the host in the systemroot\system32\driver directory. How do you determine the problem? One network problem encountered is name resolution. Replace any suspect drop or patch cables with a known good one. while green lights indicate that all is well.” What are you going to do? These problems are often difficult to resolve because there are a vast number of possibilities as to the cause. Name Resolution You are testing a new workstation and are unable to see the workstation by its domain name. Earlier. you can connect directly to the DNS and access the information stored there. Check the indicator lights on the adapter card. The difference between HOSTS and LMHOSTS is that HOSTS is used in place of DNS and LMHOSTS is used in place of WINS. we learned that workstations. To resolve this problem. One is the IP address number. NIC Indicator Lights Many network cards have from one to three LED lights (green or yellow) next to the cable connector. 260 Specialized Solutions. but are starting to get complaints that “the network is slow. Performance You think that your network is performing without problems.

An application will have to be designed to take advantage of burst mode in order to use it. Then. The answer lies in creating a performance baseline. Think of the bandwidth as the number of lanes on the highway (the more lanes. the more packets that can be moved). Resolving performance problems can be easy. The performance of a network will only be as fast as the slowest link in the entire system. To create a baseline. This may require the requestor to continue to resend its request. This means that for a small amount of time. you will need to run a series of tests and record the performance. The trick is knowing how the network performed when it was good and how it performs now. after you identify the problem. You can think of a network as a super highway and the vehicles as being packets of information. 261 . but are interrelated. it can send data at a faster than rated speed. are negligible. you can print the same document at different times throughout the day and record the time it takes to print. A server that is operating its CPU at 100% will have to delay processing of each request until it completes its current request. for the most part. if any one component is performing poorly. and average time to print the document. From this information. you can re-test the printer performance under the same conditions and determine if things have changed.Conclusion Bandwidth and Throughput Bandwidth and throughput are not the same thing. Latency delays. but can be measured and will affect performance in large networks. Just like our highway. The speed limit. if you are experiencing slow printing. Application Efficiency Any application that was not designed to work over a network will be unable to take full advantage of network protocols. The bandwidth is the number of packets that can move past a point at any given time (also measured in Mbps). everything slows down. For example. adding to the network load. For example. Reading and writing from a disk is much slower than from memory. This can slow down data transfer. A baseline is simply a record of performance criteria at a given time. Routers and switches that connect any two segments of a network can cause these delays. at a later date. it will affect the entire network. you will know the high. if the traffic gets too congested. some network operating systems will allow for burst mode operation. Server/Workstation Limits Nothing will slow down a network more than a sluggish server. Specialized Solutions. Therefore. slow. is the throughput and is measured in Mbps (Megabits per second). Latency Small delays in packet movement that are caused by devices is called latency. Inc. or maximum speed that traffic can move. A server with a memory deficiency will have to write information to a disk cache.

Network statistics will come from two sources – the server and the network. Inc. etc. you will be able to monitor such events as processor time. you will need to use some software called performance monitor for the server or network statistics software for the network itself. Windows Performance Monitor 262 Specialized Solutions. Similar software packages (usually as part of a network analyzer) will collect data for packets/sec. etc. percent of network utilization. To collect these statistics. available memory. you can monitor and collect data for a variety of events.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide The key to monitoring network performance is statistics. With this tool. Windows has a built in performance monitor as part of its administrative tools. . With this activated.

Hint: There’s a glossary in the back of this book. Keyword Bandwidth IPCONFIG Latency Media Tester Multimeter Performance Monitor PING Punch Down Tool TDR Throughput Tone Generator Tone Locator WINIPCFG Wire Crimper Definition Specialized Solutions. 263 . Inc.Conclusion KEYWORDS Exercise Define each of the following keywords.

What is the difference between bandwidth and throughput? 10. You are troubleshooting a cable problem. What utility can you use to confirm that the protocol stack is good? 6. . You have just connected a workstation to the network. You have found the cabinet with the patch panel and hub. but need to know which of the 50 cables goes to the accounting office. You have a Windows 2000 network and received complaints that the server is running slowly. After repairing a problem. Inc. What would be the best tool to help you locate the cable in question? 4. What utility can you use to determine the performance of the server? Conclusion 264 Specialized Solutions. and think it might be shorted. are you finished with the troubleshooting process? 3. What is the easiest way to tell if the network card can “see” the network? 9. What are the three primary steps to take when troubleshooting? 2. You need to know the IP address of a workstation. You have located the cable in question #3. What TCP/IP utility can you use to find the IP address of the workstation? 8. What is the loopback IP address? 7.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 11 1. What tool would you need to find the short? 5. You are working with a TCP/IP network and want to confirm the protocol stack in a specific workstation.

After taking a practice exam. 265 . and don’t forget to use the Glossary. To measure your retention of these materials. start taking the practice exams that are on the CD-ROM that was included with this course. be sure to review any areas that need improvement. Inc. and as often. When you are consistently achieving scores in the 90% range. the best thing about a self-study course is that you are able to review it as much. Thank you for allowing us to be your training partner and please let us know if we can help with any of your future training needs. so if you have any questions. When you are ready to schedule your exam. be sure to refer back to the beginning of this book for tips on what to expect at the exam site. Specialized Solutions. Remember. as you like. you are ready to sit for your certification exam. or if you just want to let us know how you are doing. at Specialized Solutions. we’d be happy to hear from you! Remember. our success is directly tied to the success that our students have with our training and certification products. We love to hear from our students. The following “Appendix A” is an excellent source of review material. We hope that you have enjoyed your Network+ training journey as much as we have enjoyed providing it to you.Conclusion This concludes our Network+ Training & Test Preparation guide.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 266 Specialized Solutions. . Inc.

Appendix A – Tech Summary Appendix A – Tech Summary The following tables summarize key information found in this course: 5-4-3 Rule When installing coaxial Ethernet cabling. Only 3 segments can contain nodes. Coaxial Cable Types Not all coaxial cables are the same. They are specified based on their impedance. • • • Maximum of 5 segments in a series. Inc. Maximum of 4 repeaters. you must conform to the 5-4-3 rule. It is expressed in ohms. Impedance is a unit of measurement for resistance to AC voltages. In order for the network to operate at peak performance. all electronic components must operate at the same impedance. 267 . Uses 10Base5 Thicknet 10Base5 Thicknet 10Base2 Thinnet Cable TV ARCnet Type RG-8 RG-11 RG-58 RG-59 RG-62 Impedance – Ohms 50 50 50 75 93 Specialized Solutions. Using the wrong cable will cause poor performance and/or failure of the network.

Military specification of RG-58 A/U. Repeaters Max Segments with Nodes 3 10Base5 Coaxial Thicknet Coaxial Thinnet Bus 500 10 100 5 4 10Base2 Bus 185 10 30 5 4 3 268 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Cable RG-58 /U RG-58 A/U RG-58 C/U RG-59 RG-6 Solid copper core. RG-62 Ethernet Cabling Cable Type Topology Max. Broadband transmission. ArcNet networks. Length (meters) Speed Mbps Nodes Per Segment Max Segments Max. such as cable television. Description Stranded wire core. but also used for broadband transmissions. Inc. Larger in diameter and rated for higher frequencies than RG-59. .

Appendix A – Tech Summary UTP Cable Categories Category 1&2 3 4 5 Wire Specs Suitable only below 4 Mbps. Data grade up to 100 Mbps. Contains a shield for use under carpets. IBM Cable Types (Token Ring) IBM has created its own standards for their Token Ring Networks. Four twisted pairs with three twists per inch. Voice-grade cable. Type 1 2 Wire Specs Two STP solid core 22 AWG wires – maximum length 101 meters (331 feet). Same as type 1. 269 Fiber Optic Data patch cables. Four twisted pairs with 4 twists per inch. Two STP –26 AWG wire. Not Defined Two STP – 26 AWG. Cannot be used for 16 Mbps Token Ring. Four twisted pairs with 5 twists per inch. Specialized Solutions. Four UTP with two twists per inch – 22 or 24 AWG wire –maximum cable length is 45 meters (148 feet). Plenum grade. Inc. Uses Voice ONLY 10 Mbps Data grade up to 16 Mbps. Not Defined Two 62. Lower cost alternative to type 1 or 2. Uses Connect between terminals and distribution boxes or between different wiring closets.5/125-micron multi-mode fibers. two STP and four UTP – maximum length 100 meters (328 feet). Two STP – 26 AWG wire. but adds voice capability along with data. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 . Six twisted pairs.

Inc.x Standards The IEEE 802 standards work in the Physical and Data Link layers of the OSI Model.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide IEEE 802.9 802.10 802.7 802.8 802.1 802.12 Basis of Standard Internetworking Logical Link Control Sub Layer CSMA/CD Ethernet Token Bus LAN Token Ring LAN Metropolitan Area Networks (MAN) Broadband Technologies Fiber Optic Technologies Hybrid Voice/Data Networks Network Security Wireless Networks High Speed LANs 270 Specialized Solutions.3 802.2 802. They also divide the Data Link Layer into two sub-layers: Logical Link Control and Media Access Controls.5 802.4 802.x Standard 802. 802.11 802.6 802. .

The following is a standard configuration for IRQ settings: IRQ 0 1 2/9 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 Function System Timer Keyboard Controller Available COM2. however.Appendix A – Tech Summary IRQ Assignments IRQ assignments can vary from computer to computer. No Usually No Yes Yes Yes If no math coprocessor No Usually Specialized Solutions. Inc. 271 . COM4 COM1. there are some that are always the same and some that can be changed. COM3 LPT2 Floppy Controller LPT1 Real-time Clock Available SCSI/available Available Math Coprocessor Primary IDE Secondary IDE Available for Change No No Yes Usually Usually Usually-Often used for NICs.

LPT2 380 to 38F 390 to 39F 272 Specialized Solutions. .LPT3 280 to 28F 290 to 29F 2A0 to 2AF 2B0 to 2BF 2C0 to 2CF 2D0 to 2DF 2E0 to 2EF – COM2 300 to 30F – Network Adapter Card 310 to 31F – Network Adapter Card 320 to 32F – Hard Disk Controller (For PS/2 Model 30) 330 to 33F 340 to 34F 350 to 35F 360 to 36F 370 to 37F . Inc. The following are common address assignments: 200 to 20F – Game Port 210 to 21F 220 to22F 230 to 23F – Bus Mouse 240 to 24F 260 to 26F 270 to 27F .Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide In addition to IRQs you may have to set the Base I/O address.

Inc.Appendix A – Tech Summary 3A0 to 3AF 3B0 to 3BF – LPT1 3C0 to 3CF – EGA/VGA 3D0 to 3DF – CGA/MCGA (also EGA/VGA in color video Modes) 3E0 to 3EF 3F0 to 3FF – Floppy Disk Controller OSI Model Specialized Solutions. 273 .

0.255.255. Subnet masks are assigned according to the following three classes: Class A B C IP Address 001.097.x Default Subnet Mask 255.x.x to 191.x.0.152 Number of Host 16.x.x. x. Repeaters Computers Devices Subnet Masking Subnet masks are used to divide an IP address into its network address and host address.x.x 192.0 255.x to 223.x.0.534 254 274 Specialized Solutions.384 2.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide OSI Model and Connectivity Devices: Layer Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Name Application Presentation Gateways Session Transport Network Data Link Physical Routers Brouter Bridges Switches NICs.x.777.x 128.x to 126.x. Inc. Hubs.0 Number of Networks 126 16.x.255.0 255. x.x.214 65. .

Sends a test packet to a specified address. Use the loopback address (127. and default gateway. 275 .0. it will return. the subnet address. Displays the basic local host configuration – IP address. PING ARP RARP Specialized Solutions. Inc.0. Used to see the entries in the Address Resolution table (uses IP addresses to find MAC addresses). Common ports are as follows: Service FTP TELNET SMTP HTTP POP3 Port 21 23 25 80 110 TCP/IP Utilities TCP/IP provides many tools for troubleshooting networks.Appendix A – Tech Summary TCP/IP Ports A port is a virtual outlet that can be opened on a network device. the subnet mask. Here are some command-line utilities: IFCONFIG IPCONFIG Shows the Linux user’s network interface configuration. Uses a MAC address to find an IP address. If all is well.1) to test the IP architecture and configuration.

Inc. Used to check the status of current IP connections. (Pronounced Trace Route. Used to check the resolution of NetBIOS names to TCP/IP addresses. Used to verify the route to a remote host. ROUTE ADD to add entries and ROUTE DELETE to remove entries. NBSTAT NETSTAT TRACERT NSLOOKUP Topology Review In a bus topology. all computers are connected to a hub. In a star topology. 276 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide ROUTE Used to see the local routing table and to add entries to it. .) Used to verify entries on a DNS server. all computers are connected in a series. Use ROUTE PRINT to display contents.

In a mesh topology. 277 . Inc. all computers are connected to each other.Appendix A – Tech Summary In a ring topology. all computers are logically connected in a circle. Specialized Solutions.

resistance.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Transmission Media Media UTP STP Coaxial Thicknet Coaxial Thinnet Fiber Optic Infrared Bandwidth (Mbps) 4-100 16-155 10 10 2000 1-10 Nodes/Segment 1 Varies 100 30 1 NA Maximum Nodes per Network 1024 260 300 90 1024 Varies Maximum Cable Length (meters) 100 100 500 185 2000 32 Troubleshooting Tools Hardware Volt/Ohm Meter Cable Tester Oscilloscope Uses Used to test voltages. Also called a network analyzer. and continuity of electronic devices and circuitry. An electronic device that graphically displays frequency and magnitude of analog signals. Can also be used for precise voltage measurements. TDR – checks and locates breaks in cables. Used with TDR to locate cable breaks. Protocol Analyzer 278 Specialized Solutions. Inc. Used to capture packets on a network and analyze them. .

and networks. Inc. Event Viewer SNMP Specialized Solutions. interface cards. and bridges). Simple Network Management Protocol – used to monitor network devices (servers.Appendix A – Tech Summary Software Performance Monitor Uses Use to monitor and graphically display various performance parameters found on workstations. servers. Displays or prints a list of events. routers. hubs. Used to provide information for network baselines. 279 .

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 280 Specialized Solutions. Inc. .

cnet.com Specialized Solutions. 281 . Inc.Appendix B – Useful Web Sites Appendix B – Useful Web Sites Microsoft: http://www.novell.com Novell http://www.microsoft.com Other Helpful Sites http://www.

Inc. .Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 282 Specialized Solutions.

search for these organizations on the Internet. 283 . EIA The Electronics Industries Association (EIA) is a group of American manufacturers of electronic equipment. Inc. This is a common code for basic characters and numbers. In the computing industry. For additional information. ANSI This is one of the most common standards in the computing industry. This appendix will summarize several of the important standards used in the network industry. it is perhaps best known for the development of the ASCII character set. Specialized Solutions. Perhaps the most well known standard is the RS-232 standard for serial communication via DB-9 and DB-25 connector.Appendix C – Network Standards Organizations Appendix C – Network Standards Organizations The networking industry is full of standards and committees making new standards. As its name implies. let alone the networking industry. It is prominent in developing standards for the interface between data processing equipment and communication equipment. CCITT The CCITT (Comité Consultatif Internationale de Télégraphie et Téléphonie) is an international organization also known as the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee. Perhaps the most famous standards are the “V” standards for modems and Faxes. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI) is an organization of industry and business groups who develop trade and communication standards. it is responsible for establishing standards for communication. ANSI also is the United States representative on several international organizations like ISO and CCITT (see below).

Inc. its emphasis is on SQL or the Structured Query Language. See Appendix A for a summary of the 802. As you may guess from its name. Since they cover a wide variety of equipment. Be careful to not get ISO and OSI confused. the IEEE is subdivided into committees. The one that is important to networking professionals is called the IEEE 802. . As long as both are SQL compliant. SAG SAG or SQL Access Group is working in conjunction with ISO to develop interoperability standards. ISO The International Standards Organization (ISO) is responsible for establishing international standards for all services and manufactured product. the data can be smoothly transferred.) publishes many standards for electrical and electronic equipment.x sub-committees. These standards are used for equipment operating in the Physical and Data link layers of the OSI Model. Inc. This is a common platform for transferring data from one database application to another. A major ISO contribution to the network community was the development of the OSI (Open System Interconnection) model. 284 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide IEEE The IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.x committee.

Method of payment. Payment must be made each time you take the test. and may be obtained by calling Prometric or VUE. When you call. Inc. Prices subject to change without notice.Appendix D – How to Register for the Exam Appendix D – How to Register for the Exam To Register for the Network+ Exams Register for the Network+ Certification Exam by calling 1-888-895-6116 for Prometric or 1-877-551-7587 for VUE. The test is available to anyone who wants to take the test. To register via the Internet. either by credit card. Tests are given at both Prometric and VUE Authorized Testing Centers.vue. Vouchers and coupons are also redeemed at this time. Specialized Solutions. or by requesting an invoice be sent to you or your employer.com for Prometric or www. 285 . please have the following available: Social Security Number or Testing ID Two forms of ID (one with photo) Mailing address and telephone number. credit card or voucher. Date you wish to take the test.2test. go to www.com for VUE. Individuals may retake the test as often as they like. Payment is made at the time of registration.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 286 Specialized Solutions. Inc. .

The file server on an AppleTalk network. or bits per second (bps). Inc. or a circuit or device designed to handle such signals. The highest layer of the OSI Model. Application Server ARCNet ARP Attenuation AWG Bandwidth Specialized Solutions. A continuously variable signal. Software. or computers on the network (nodes). The Apple networking protocol. it supplies functions to applications. these three terms are often used interchangeably. opposite of digital. Acknowledgment message confirming receipt of the data packet. Attached Resource Computer Network Address Resolution Protocol The signal loss due to the physical properties of copper wire that happens over distance. so they can communicate with other applications or nodes. A dedicated server for applications. program. American Wire Gauge AWG is the standard that describes wire thickness.Appendix E – Glossary Appendix E – Glossary Access Method ACK Active Hub Analog Signal AppleShare AppleTalk Application Application Layer A way of accessing the network. 287 . usually expressed in cycles per second (Hertz or Hz). Regenerates or amplifies a signal when it is passed through. The AWG wire number decreases as the wire thickness increases. The difference between the lowest and highest transmission channel frequencies.

Inc. British Naval Connector BOOTstrap Protocol Boot Programmable Read Only Memory is used on networks that utilize diskless workstations. The location in a computer’s RAM of the beginning of the buffer area that is reserved for use by the NIC. . An area of memory that holds information for a peripheral device until it can be processed. A LAN in which all workstations are connected to a single cable. Broadband allows two or more channels to share the bandwidth of the cable or medium. Uses the entire capacity of the cable as a single channel. such as Microsoft. Class C IP addresses are used for smaller networks that do not exceed 254 hosts. or DEC. Hardware that connects one network with another. GM. these are all in use at the present time. Companies contracted to carry our data over long distances. Buffer Bus Topology Carrier Cellular Networking Class A IP Address Class B IP Address Class C IP Address 288 Specialized Solutions. A process used to identify any area on the network that may be experiencing problems. IP Address used by very large networks. such as IBM. Can also refer to a class of memory registers and devices that match data transfer speeds between computers and hardware (peripherals). IP Address used by medium-sized networks. A form of mobile computing. A bus driver.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Base I/O Port Address Base Memory Address Baseband Beaconing BNC Connector BOOTP Boot Prom Bridge Broadband The channel through which data flows between a computer’s hardware (such as a NIC) and the CPU. The signal flow is uni-directional.

or Cyclic redundancy Code. from computer or network to another. which is. at the sender’s level and then decoded at the recipient’s level. 289 . Concentrator Cooperative Multitasking CRC Crosstalk CSMA/CA CSMA/CD CSNW CSU/DSU Data Data Encryption Specialized Solutions. The signal bleed that occurs between individual wires in a cable. as recognized by a computer and transmitted across a variety media. to allow other tasks to run. in which it is the responsibility of the currently running task to give up the processor. Same as a hub. Cyclic Redundancy Check. A form of multitasking. Software used by the client. The method used by the NIC to count and pace the number of signals that it sends and receives. or language. stored. using a specific protocol. is a number derived from. itself. called a server. An electrical cable consisting of a solid piece of metal wire surrounded by insulation.Appendix E – Glossary Client Client Software Clocking Coaxial Cable User computer “being served” by another computer. surrounded by a tubular piece of plastic. or transmitted with a group of data in order to detect data corruption. Inc. Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection Carrier Sense NetWare Changes the frame types between the LAN and WAN Information. Data that is encoded for security reasons.

A limited form of bus mastering. in a round-robin fashion. Also called data striping. Inc. Baseband uses digital signals over a single frequency. such as an individual file. so that the segments can be written to multiple disk drives. When you type the IP address of the gateway routers you have installed on your network.A method for leasing and maintaining that lease for IP addresses and related information to clients. whichever one appears first on the list is considered the default gateway. (Simple “on” or “off” signal. .) Being able to recover data from a disaster. Domain Name System Default Gateway Demand Priority DHCP Digital Signal Disaster Recovery Disk Mirroring Disk Striping DMA (Direct Memory Access) DNS 290 Specialized Solutions. The use of two or more hard disks that “mirror” the main one. DMA allows a device to read and write memory without intervention by the CPU. this is the dividing into segments of logically sequential data.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Data Link Layer The Data Link layer is the second lowest layer in the OSI model. so that one can take over for the other if it fails. This access method is designed for the 100 Mbps Ethernet standard 100VG-AnyLAN Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol . for sending on the Physical layer. It is the last stop before the data packets are placed on the media for transmission. the second disk can locate the next segment while data is being transferred from the first disk. It performs error checking and re-transmits frames that were not received correctly. It also receives acknowledgement frames. which are large areas of data that are split into smaller non-contiguous blocks. The Data Link layer splits data into frames. If the processor is capable of reading or writing data faster than a single disk can supply or accept it.

Specialized Solutions. Inc.25 packet switching technology. 291 DUN EISA Bus Ethernet EtherTalk Event Viewer FAT Fax Server Fiber-Optic Cable File Server Firewall Frame Relay Frames FTP Full-Duplex . A group of bits containing address information. File Transfer Protocol Data can travel in both directions at once. error detection. A local area network (LAN) recognized as the industry standard. A way to run AppleTalk on coaxial cable using an EtherTalk NB NIC. and other control information. An improved version of X. Optical fibers carry digital signals in the form of modulated pulses of light. sent over a communications channel. A network’s central computer.Appendix E – Glossary DSMN DSMN (Directory Service Manager for NetWare) is another add-on utility that is used to integrate user and group account information between the two operating systems. with a very large amount of storage space for shared files. Dial-up Networking Extended Industry Standard Architecture is a PC bus that converts the PC bus from 16-bits to 32-bits. A Windows NT utility that will allow you to log any events and errors. File Allocation Table A server on a network that is configured to provide both incoming and outgoing fax services to the entire network. A set of programs running on a network’s gateway server that monitors incoming and outgoing traffic and allows only authorized packets to be transmitted or received.

A network topology that combines bus. is an extension to the Internet Protocol (IP) that allows for the generation of error messages.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Gateway A computer that acts as a translator. is usually represented in dotted decimal notation. even though there may be multiple machines from multiple vendors. Independent Computing Architecture Internet Control Message Protocol. but only one at a time. that enables two networks. RFC 792. test packets. It precedes the actual data. Internet Protocol This 32-bit host address defined by the Internet Protocol in STD 5. defined in STD 5. The portion of a packet that contains source and destination addresses. and other information. to communicate with each other. Text files that are used to look up and resolve names to IP addresses. Hypertext Transfer Protocol HyperText Transport Protocol Secure The center of a cabling system or a network with star topology architecture. Internet Connection Sharing Shows the user’s network interface configuration Internet Messaging Access Protocol The ability of software and hardware to communicate. GSNW Half-Duplex Header HOSTS and LMHOSTS files HTTP HTTPS Hub Hybrid Topology ICA ICMP ICS IFCONFIG IMAP4 Interoperability IP IP Address 292 Specialized Solutions. Inc. RFC 791. Gateway Service for NetWare Half-Duplex can send transmissions both ways (send and receive). or ring topologies. and informational messages related to IP. star. HOSTS is used for DNS and LMHOSTS is used for WINS. . using different protocols.

Media Access Control – a sublayer of the Data Link Layer.” Server used for E-mail. Metropolitan Area Network The primary software package used by the administrator. and video data sources. Integrated Services Digital Network is a set of communication standards that allows a single wire or optical fiber to carry voice. data.Appendix E – Glossary IPCONFIG IPsec IRQ DOS command that tells you the IP address for your computer. Logical Link Control – a sublayer of the Data Link Layer AppleTalk networks are usually called LocalTalk. Industry Standard Architecture refers to the bus architecture used in the IBM PC. across a network connection. The time it takes for a packet to go from sender to receiver. Multistation Access Unit in a Token Ring network. Specialized Solutions. internally wired to connect the stations into a logical ring. A system for user authentication Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol Local Area Network A wireless network standard that uses laser beams for the transmission of data. 293 ISA Bus ISDN Kerberos L2TP LAN Laser Transmissions Latency LLC LocalTalk MAC Mail Server MAN Management Software MAU/MSAU . a device to attach multiple network stations in a star topology. The MAC address is the address that is hardwired onto the NIC by the manufacturer. Inc. it’s “hardware address. A security protocol that works at network layer Interrupt Request causes the processor to temporarily suspend normal instruction execution and to start executing an interrupt handler routine.

Also known as a network interface card. protocol as well A group of computers linked together for the purpose of sharing resources. Message Handling System – A standard defined by ITU-T as X. A method of data transmission. Performing multiple tasks simultaneously. Inc. Much like your local radio station. The actual ring in a Token Ring network is in the hub. The transmitter and receiver are tuned to the same frequency. a 32-bit bus. Tool used for testing the continuity and pin-outs of a cable Every device is connected to every other device by separate cables and has redundant paths. Network Attached Storage Network Address Translation NetBIOS Statistics NetWare Directory Services Names used with WINS.400 and by ISO as Message-Oriented Text Interchange Standard (MOTIS). One of the most basic tools for electronic troubleshooting. A type of hub. Media Media Tester Mesh Topology MHS Microwave Transmissions Multimeter Multistation Access Unit Multitasking Narrow-Band Radio NAS NAT NBTSTAT NDS NetBIOS Network Network Adapter Card 294 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide MCA Bus Micro Channel Architecture. . among others. and is used by CompuServe. Single Frequency Radio. totally incompatible with the original PC bus. Provides the physical connection to the network cable. A wireless network standard that uses microwave signals for data transmission. introduced by IBM for its PS/2 computer line. MHS provides the functions for global E-mail transfer among local mail systems.

A protocol that cannot be routed or passed through routers on a network. Acts as a connection point only. A 32-bit architecture bus for PC expansion cards. Network Operating System NT File System A TCP/IP utility command that will return information regarding the status of a network. depending on the protocol. Specialized Solutions. The network layer handles all the routing information as packets travel from one network to another. Inc. Each part of an IP Address that contains eight bits of data is called an octet. A packet actually refers to Application layer data units (APDU). A Windows NT service that allows for interoperability with the NetWare NOS. including network connectivity. Refers to the OSI (Open Systems Interface) Model.Appendix E – Glossary Network Administrator Network Interface Card (NIC) Network Layer The individual who has complete responsibility for maintaining a network. A generic term used to describe a unit of data. The hardware that is used to construct the network plays an important role at this layer. A user has to enter a password to gain access to the network or to shared resources. PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) cards are credit card sized expansion buses that are used in portable computers (laptops) to provide the same expandability enjoyed by desktop computers. They extend the connection between the computer and the hub or between two hubs. 295 Non-Routable Protocol NOS NTFS NTSTAT NWLink Octet OSI Packets Passive Hub Password Security Patch Cable PCI Bus PCMCIA Card . An adapter circuit board installed in a computer that provides a physical connection to a network. A “packet” may also refer to a frame or datagram.

A way of testing the server to see if it is alive and functioning.1. converting character sets and encrypting data. The space between the ceiling and the floor above. Post Office Protocol 3 Point-to-Point Protocol Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol Introduced in version 3. The preemptive feature allows NT to hand out slices of CPU time. Dedicated server for printing. other processes will still run. A group of protocols that are used to communicate between computers on a network. The Physical layer is the lowest layer in the OSI Model. Although included as part of Windows NT. such as a printer or scanner. used to circulate air through a building. The Presentation layer formats data exchange. Defines a channel between a device and the processor. A software tool that is used to monitor the performance of a network server. Inc.5 of Windows 3. which means that a process can take control of the CPU and check for other processes. Peripheral Physical Layer PING Plenum Port Number POP3 PPP PPTP Preemptive Multitasking Presentation Layer Print Server Protocol Stack 296 Specialized Solutions. The OSI model is the ideal protocol stack. .Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Peer-to-Peer Performance Monitor All the computers on the network can act as either a client or server. many third-party applications are available. this feature has a different scheme called cooperative multitasking. allowing incompatible processes in the Application layer to communicate with the Session layer. and even if a process takes full control. and running on TCP/IP. A hardware device. This layer determines the interface hardware and the medium that will be used to transmit the data from the Data Link layer. depending upon the needs of the user.

A device that forwards packets between networks. A service provided by Windows NT that allows most of the services provided by a network. Used to increase cable distances in network environments. For example. the proxy server.Appendix E – Glossary Proxy Server One that serves many clients through only one connection. Flat cable with 2 or 4 conductors. For example. Redirects a call from one port to another. The signal is beamed towards a central unit. In Token-Ring networks. Connector used with standard telephone wire. the ring speed on the NIC is set to either 4 Mbps or 16 Mbps. i. Will hold up to 4 pairs of conductors. A protocol that can be routed over the internet or through routers on a network. Connector used with UTP and STP network cables. which then routes the signal appropriately. including support for dialup and logon. The services or peripherals that are shared over the network. the user is connecting to the Internet via a secondary source. Used for “punching” down wire to a block Redundant Arrays of Independent Disks Uses a MAC address to find an IP address. to be accessed via a modem. In a Ring topology. the devices are connected in a continuous loop. Storage Area Network Punch Down Tool RAID RARP RAS Redirector/Requester Reflective Infrared Repeater Resources Ring Speed Ring Topology RJ-11 Connector RJ-45 Connector Routable Protocol Router SAN Specialized Solutions. Inc. 297 .e. redirects a print job from the local port to the network printer.

A computer on a network that provides services to other computers. Synchronous Digital Hierarchy The system used to protect data on a network from unauthorized use. The effective distance of the signal is limited to about 100 feet. etc. The Session layer handles such things as security authentication. is software that allows the Internet Protocol (IP). normally used on Ethernet.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Satellite Microwave Scatter Infrared A wireless network that utilizes microwave signals to transmit data. as opposed to duplex. usually over Ethernet. . was developed to manage nodes on an IP network. defined in RFC 1055. Narrow-Band Radio Transmission Serial Line Internet Protocol. Software that resides on a server. to be used over a serial link. A type of cable in which pairs of conductors are twisted together to prevent possible cross-talk from nearby wiring. as the signal is designed to bounce off of walls. connection establishment and release. Transmission rates are slower with this type. data transfer. Allowing files to be shared from one computer to another. until it reaches the receiver. Simple Network Management Protocol. SNMP is not limited to TCP/IP. A uni-directional data channel. acknowledgments (ACK). SDH Security Server Server Software Session Layer Sharing Shielded Twisted Pair Simplex Single-Frequency Radio SLIP SMAU SMTP SNMP 298 Specialized Solutions. Inc. RFC 1157. Smart Multistation Access Unit Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is used to transfer E-mail between computers. the Internet standard protocol defined in STD 15. ceilings.

Transmission Control Protocol over Internet Protocol. Specialized Solutions. A connector that has a built-in resistor in order to absorb signals and eliminate signal bounce. measured in Mbps (Megabits per minute). the entire network goes down.Appendix E – Glossary SONET Spread-Spectrum Radio Synchronous Optical Network Spread-spectrum broadcasts over a range of frequencies. Time-Domain Reflectometer – A cable tester. that uses a large diameter. the official protocol of the Internet. If the hub fails. 299 SSL Star Topology Subnet Mask Subnetting TCP/IP TDR Terminator Terrestrial Microwave Thicknet Thinnet Throughput Token Passing Token Ring TokenTalk . An Ethernet cable variant commonly known as 10base5. Using binary addition. This type of transmission is commonly used to connect multiple LAN segments together. or across large flat open areas. rigid coaxial cable with multiple shielding and an impedance of 50 ohms. such as bodies of water or deserts. A LAN topology that uses an access method called token passing. The maximum speed that “traffic” can move. A form of microwave communication used for earthbased communication between two buildings.5 Standard) environment. Maximum segment length is 500 meters. A type of coaxial cable whose maximum segment length is 185 meters. A way to run AppleTalk in a Token Ring (IEEE 802. Secure Sockets Layer A LAN topology in which all workstations are wired directly to a central workstation called a hub. The process of subdividing a network into logical units. An access method used in a Token Ring topology. so it is less susceptible to eavesdropping. Inc. a router can determine what addresses are local and what addresses are for other subnets within the network.

Tool for stripping and cutting wire Tone Locator TRACERT Trailer Transceiver Transport Layer UDP UNIX Unshielded Twisted Pair Vampire Tap VLAN WAN WINIPCFG Wire Crimper 300 Specialized Solutions. The Transport layer is responsible for packaging (and un-packaging) the data for transport.” Trace Route command in NT allows you to specify a remote host and report back on each subsequent router and the times it takes to traverse those routers in a command line interface. User Datagram Protocol. Virtual LAN Wide Area Network A command used to display the current configuration of a Windows computer. defined in STD 6. A major operating system that is primarily used on minicomputers and has many features that are favored in the engineering and scientific environments.” A receiver set to the frequency of the generator. Twisted network cables that do not have any shielding. Used on transceivers. and for the errorfree delivery of the transmitted data. Additionally named traceroute in UNIX environments. like TCP. A device that transmits and receives data. is layered on top of IP.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Tone Generator Connected to the wires at the known location (the room with the outlet). Inc. which. this applies a signal on the wires. it will emit a tone. RFC 768 is a connectionless protocol. . thus locating the wires. The “hound. The “fox. The part of a data packet that contains the error corrections information. When the receiver is placed in close proximity to the wire that has the signal applied. Connectors that utilize sharp teeth to pierce the cable jacket to make the connection.

such as Token Ring. 301 . Inc. AppleTalk can incorporate other types of networks. resolve and also release the mapping of their network NetBIOS name to an IP address.Appendix E – Glossary WINS SERVER A way for Microsoft hosts to register themselves. using zones Zones Specialized Solutions. A named Subnetwork used for expanding the LocalTalk network or for relieving traffic on a larger network.

.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 302 Specialized Solutions. Inc.

Files are easily accessed by all users. inexpensive to install (no need to buy expensive server). such as data. 6. No security. Dragging a printer from computer to computer for users to utilize is another form of a sneaker net. Access can be denied to unauthorized users (security). What is the main reason for networking computers? To share resources. A WAN is created by connecting LANs together. Name some disadvantages of a Peer-to-Peer network. What is the key difference between a local area network and a wide area network? A LAN is the basic building block (and smallest) of a network.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers The following are the questions found at the end of each chapter along with the correct answers. It is confined to a limited area. loss of performance occurs if expanded over 10 workstations. Name some advantages of a Peer-to-Peer network. Review Questions Chapter 1 1. 4. 5. Specialized Solutions. data backups can be more easily and routinely performed. 7. LANs typically also have much faster communication speed than WANs. 2. Workstations need to be close together (in a relatively small area. and manage (each user manages their own computer) for a small number of workstations (10 or less). 3. What is a “sneaker net”? The “old fashioned” way computer users shared resources by taking a file on a floppy disk to the computer that had the services they needed to use. like one office). 303 . A WAN is not geographically limited. Name some advantages of having centralized documents. and peripheral devices. applications. configure. Inc. Simple to install. What does MAN stand for and why is it no longer in use? Metropolitan Area Networks have been replaced by the Internet.

Non-preemptive multitasking is when the task decides when it is done with the CPU. File and resource security available to limit unauthorized access.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 8. More difficult to install and configure. Preemptive multitasking means that the operating system can take control of the processor without a task’s permission. Increased performance on large networks. Some NOSs function as the operating system that runs a computer’s stand-alone functions as well as its network interfaces. Centralized administration. Ease of data backups. Name some advantages of a Server-based network. 304 Specialized Solutions. What is the difference between an operating system and a network operating system? Network operating systems are specialized operating systems designed to function in a network environment. Name some disadvantages of a Server-based network. Inc. and Demand Priority. The three basic topologies are: Bus. Centralized location of resources (server). What is the difference between a physical and logical topology? Physical topologies are the actual wires and hardware that we can see. What is the difference between preemptive and non-preemptive multitasking? Multitasking means that a computer has the ability to perform more than one task at a time. Star. Name the three basic topologies. 11. They represent what the topology looks like. Name two media access methods The access methods are CSMA/CD CSMA/CA. Review Questions Chapter 2 1. Logical topologies represent the way that a networks functions. 2. 12. and Ring. 9. 10. . Token Passing. Can be expanded as network grows. Expensive to install (will need to purchase expensive server). more difficult to manage (needs an administrator).

redirecting them to the server. 550 MB of free hard drive space. NetWare is designed as an operating system that will overlay _____________ environments. and volumes is also handled with NDS. 9. It is designed as an operating system that will overlay multi-operating system environments. and file and print services. Specialized Solutions. What are the minimum hardware requirements for installing Novell NetWare version 5? Pentium Class or Higher CPU. routing. name service. web-publishing. 5. The purpose of the redirector is to make network resources look like local resources to the application. What is the purpose of the redirector? The redirector (in Novell NetWare it is called the requester) forwards requests away from the local bus. 4.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 3. What is NDS? NDS (NetWare Directory Services) is the core of the NetWare operating system. 6. management. Define interoperability. servers. NetWare is a reliable operating system that provides excellent performance and security. 305 . messaging. Inc. Unlike NetWare. What is NTFS? NTFS is the file system in Windows NT and it must be utilized in order to take full advantage of NT’s security features. 7. Interoperability describes the ability of an operating system to interact with other operating systems. Organization of network resources such as users. groups. 8. Windows NT combines the _____________ and the ___________________ into one. It is a hierarchically organized database that provides security. 64 MB RAM. Windows NT combines the operating system and the network operating system into one.

Session. GSNW (Gateway Services for NetWare) provides the gateway between an NT domain and the NetWare server. A domain is simply a group of workstations with a shared security database. Who developed the OSI model? The OSI model was developed by ISO (International Organization for Standardization). What type of computer was developed by Apple computer in 1984? The Macintosh 15.1 that includes the ability to run a peer-to-peer network. Presentation. . Review Questions Chapter 3 1. NWLink is a protocol based on Novell’s IPX/SPX and is used for communication between the two systems. What is a domain? NT uses domains in order to accomplish its security goals. What OS is similar to UNIX and is a publicly open system? Linux 14. Transport. What are the minimum hardware requirements for Windows NT Server? 476DX-3 CPU. 2. Data Link. and Physical 3. A network adapter card operates at the _______ layer of the OSI model Network layer 306 Specialized Solutions.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 10. Name the seven layers of the OSI model. FPNW (File and Print Services for NetWare) allows NetWare clients to access NT file and print services. Inc. DSMN (Directory Service Manager for NetWare) is used to integrate user and group account information between NT and NetWare. 16 MB RAM. 12. Name some of the services and protocols that Microsoft included with Windows NT to ensure interoperability with NetWare.What type of network would utilize Windows for Workgroups as an operating system? Windows for Workgroups is a version of Windows 3. Network. Migration Tool for NetWare is used to convert NetWare accounts to NT. CSNW (Client Services for NetWare) allows NT workstations to use file and print services on a NetWare server. Application. 13. 11. 125 MB free hard drive space.

What is the function of the Presentation Layer? The Presentation layer is the translator for the network. 13. Which part of this MAC address is the Device ID? D3-B4-01 14. A router operates at the _________layer of the OSI model. This is not the actual application or program. managing. Inc. What is the function of the Application Layer? The Application layer is responsible for communication between a user’s application and the network. A bridge operates at the ________ layer of the OSI model. The ____________ layer is responsible for the mechanical and electrical functions of transmitting data over a network. Which OSI layer is responsible for establishing. Data Link layer 5. Which OSI layer is responsible the MAC address? The Data Link layer 8. and ending connections? The Session layer 12. Data compression takes place at the __________ layer of the OSI. 9. Network Layer 6. 11.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 4. 307 . It translates data into a format that is compatible with the network and back into a format that is compatible with the computer. simply a support layer that allows an application to use the network by acting as a translator. What is a MAC address? The MAC address is another name for the 12-digit (6-byte) hexadecimal address that is hardwired on the NIC by the manufacturer. Physical 10. Presentation layer 7. It is a computer’s physical address. Which OSI layer makes routing decisions? The Network layer Specialized Solutions.

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 15. Which OSI layer is responsible for delivering data in sequence, without duplication and error free? The Transport layer 16. The Data Link layer has been split into two sub-layers. What are they? The Logical Link (LLC) layer and the Media Access Control (MAC) layer 17. What is the function of a Gateway? A gateway translates between two networks that use different protocols. A computer with special software serves as a gateway and allows for communication between completely dissimilar networks. 18. Which IEEE standard defines the Logical Link Control (LLC) sub-layer? 802.2 19. What are NDIS and ODI? They are Network Adapter Card interface specifications. They are incompatible with each other. NDIS (Network Driver Interface Specification) was co-developed by Microsoft and 3Com, while ODI (Open Data Link Interface) was co-developed by Novell and Apple. The purpose of these standards is to allow operating system vendors to write multiple drivers for the same NIC. This way more than one protocol can be bound to a single NIC. 20. Describe protocol binding. In order to function, a protocol must be bound to the NIC. This binding process is what links the protocol stacks to the NIC driver. It is possible to bind two protocols the one NIC (such as TCP/IP and IPX/IPX) or to have two NICs with one protocol bound to each one. The order in which these protocols are bound to the NIC determines which one the network operating system will attempt to use first. 21. Which is faster, connection-oriented communication or connectionless communication? Connectionless communication is faster, but connection-oriented communication is more reliable. 22. . Name as many routable protocols as you can remember. AppleTalk, DECnet, IPX/SPX, PPP, PPTP, SLIP, SMB, SNA, TCP/IP, UDP, X.25, XNS 23.. You have expanded your NetBEUI network into two segments and are using an intelligent router to optimize network traffic. Will this work? Why or Why not? 308

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers No, NetBEUI is a non-routable protocol.

Review Questions Chapter 4

1. What is the maximum segment length of Thinnet? 185 meters 2. What is the maximum segment length of Thicknet? 500 meters 3. What type of connectors are used with Coaxial cable? BNC connectors 4. What is the purpose of a transceiver? A transceiver is a device that both transmits and receives data on a network. 5. How is a vampire tap connected? They utilize sharp teeth that puncture the cable to make the connection. 6. What is the purpose of plenum cabling? Plenum grade cabling is used in the plenum (the space between the ceiling and the floor above, which is used to circulate air in a building). Fire codes usually call for special cable in this area because PVC cable gives off poisonous gas and fumes when burned, which would end up being circulated throughout the building. 7. What is the maximum segment length of UTP? 100 meters 8. What is the transmission speed of category 5 cabling? Up to 100 Mbps

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

309

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 9. What is the most popular of the cable types? UTP is the less expensive of the twisted pair cable types. It is also flexible and easy to install, making it the most popular cable type. 10. Which twisted pair cabling is less sensitive to EMI? STP is insulated with a foil mesh between the wire pairs, which results in less sensitivity to EMI and crosstalk. 11. What type of connector is used with twisted pair cable? RJ-45 connectors 12. What is the most expensive cable type? Fiber-Optic cable is the ideal cable type for networking. However, it is the most expensive and most difficult to install. 13. What is the least expensive of the cable types? UTP is the least expensive of the cable types. It is also flexible and easy to install, making it the most popular cable type. 14. List some advantages of fiber-optic cable. Fiber-optic supports extremely high bandwidths, segment lengths of up to several miles, and it is not subject to EMI or eavesdropping. 15. What does AWG stand for and what is it? American Wire Gauge (AWG) is the standard that describes wire thickness. The AWG wire number decreases as the wire thickness increases. 16. Describe baseband. Baseband uses the entire capacity of the cable as a single channel. 17. Describe broadband. Broadband allows two or more channels to share the bandwidth of the cable, making the signal flow unidirectional. 18. What is the difference between simplex, half-duplex, and full-duplex communication? Simplex communication is one way, can receive but not send. For example, a pager. Half-duplex communication can send or receive, but not at the same time. For example, a CB radio. Full-duplex can send and receive signals at the same time. For example, the telephone. 310 Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 19. What is the function of a network adapter card? Network Adapter Cards or Network Interface Cards (NICs) are used to connect the computer to the network. (They make the physical connection to the network.) NICs translate the data that computers can understand into signals that can be transmitted over the network medium and back again. 20. In Token Ring networks, what are the two ring speeds available? In a Token Ring network if the correct ring speed is not selected a computer will not be able to connect to the network. The two choices available are 4 Mbps and 16 Mbps. 21. Where would you expect to find a PCMCIA card? PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) cards are credit card sized expansion buses that are used in portable computers (laptops) to provide the same expandability enjoyed by desktop computers, including network connectivity. 22. What are some of the reasons you would need to install a wireless network? To create a temporary network, to backup a cable-based network, to provide a mobile network environment, for areas where running cable would be impossible or unsightly, outdoor installations and to connect to remote sites such as a ship or oil platform. 23. What are the four basic wireless transmission types? Infrared, Laser, Radio, and Microwave 24. Which is the most secure type of radio wireless network? Spread-Spectrum Radio is more secure than Single-Frequency Radio (Narrow-Band Radio) because it broadcasts over a range of frequencies instead of just one. 25. Which microwave transmission type is used to transmit globally? Satellite microwave is used to transmit globally; Terrestrial microwave is used to transmit over shorter distances.

Review Questions Chapter 5

1. What are the three primary access methods? CSMA/CD & CSMA/CA, Token Passing, and Demand Priority Specialized Solutions, Inc. 311

Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 2. Describe the difference between the two different contention methods CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA. CSMA/CD stands for Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection and CSMA/CA stands for Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance. Both CSMA/CD and CSMA/CA listen to the network cable to determine if it is free (Carrier Sense), if no data is traveling, a CSMA/CD computer will transmit. If there is another computer on the network that transmitted at exactly the same time, a data collision will occur, and both sets of data will be destroyed. CSMA/CD detects that a collision has occurred and waits a specified amount of time before re-transmitting. With CSMA/CA the process is much the same except that instead of just transmitting when it senses that the cable is free, it will send a signal that it is about to transmit. This will cause any other computer that was about to transmit to wait and so data collisions are avoided. This extra step can slow down network traffic, so CSMA/CA is not the most popular of the two contention methods. 3. Why isn’t token passing considered a contention method? A computer on a token passing access method network must possess the token in order to transmit data. Therefore, only one computer at a time will transmit in this kind of architecture, and so, no contention. 4. Describe how data is transmitted in Token Ring architecture A token, which is a special kind of packet, is circulated around the ring from computer to computer in a Token Ring network. A computer that wants to send data onto the network waits until the token is passed to it and takes possession of it. The transmitting computer encodes the token with the data that it wants to transmit, as well as header and trailer information that contain the destination and source addresses, as well as error control information. It then passes the token back out onto the ring where it travels on until it reaches the destination computer. The destination computer copies the data into its buffer and adds some acknowledgment information (or re-transmittal information if it detected errors) and releases the frame back out onto the network where it travels back to the source computer. Assuming that the data was transmitted error-free, the source computer removes the “used” frame from the network and creates a new “free” token to release back out onto the network.

312

Specialized Solutions, Inc.

Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 5. What happens if two computers using the demand priority access method transmit at exactly the same time? If the hub receives two transmissions at exactly the same time the one with the highest priority is processed first. If the two transmissions have the same priority level, they are processed at the same time by alternating between the transmissions. 6. How is data transmitted over the network cable? In packets or frames. (Small chunks of data at a time.) 7. What is CRC and what part of the packet is it usually located in? CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is a mathematical calculation that is calculated at the source computer and included in the trailer of the packet. When data arrives at the destination computer, the calculation is redone and if it calculates as it did at the source computer it is assumed that the data arrived intact. 8. What sort of information do packet headers contain? The header contains information such as an alert signal that announces that data is being transmitted, the source and destination addresses and clocking information. 9. What does the “T” in 10BaseT indicate? The first part indicates transmission speed (10 means it transmits at 10 Mbps), the second part “Base” indicates that it uses baseband (single channel) technology and the last part indicates the cabling type, or maximum segment length in the case of coaxial cable. (“T” indicates Twisted-pair). 10. What is the maximum segment length in 10Base2? 185 Meters. The “2” in this case means 2 times 100 meters, but in the case of Thinnet coaxial cable the maximum segment length is 185 meters. 11. What type of connectors are used in 10Base5? BNC connectors 12. What type of cable is used in 10BaseFL? Fiber-Optic 13. Name the two main 100 Mbps Ethernet Standards. 100VG-AnyLAN, also called 100BaseVG, VG, and AnyLAN. The VG stands for Voice Grade. 100BaseX is sometimes called Fast Ethernet. It has different specifications depending upon the type of cabling used (hence the “X” in the area that indicates cable type). Specialized Solutions, Inc. 313

314 Specialized Solutions. Since no other computer can transmit while one computer has the token. Which IEEE Specification defines Token Ring? The IEEE 802. This signal is called beaconing and it travels from computer to computer. . data collisions are avoided. 21. Describe a MIC connector. It does this by transmitting a signal every seven seconds. Which IEEE Specification defines Ethernet? The IEEE 802. What are the two transmission speeds of Token Ring? 4 Mbps and 16 Mbps 17. Any connector can be connected to another MIC connector. How are data collisions avoided in the Token Ring architecture? A computer must posses the token in order to transmit data. The main thing is that data only travels in one direction on a Token Ring network. however.5 says it travels clockwise. A SMAU may have the capability to shut down a connection that is producing errors thereby allowing the rest of the network to function.5 standard 16. It can be either depending upon how it is set up. 19. IEEE 802. If a computer doesn’t receive an expected signal from its upstream neighbor it will notify the monitor that a problem may exist. It also ensures that only one token is traveling the ring at a time and investigates any frames that have traveled around the ring more than once. This is a hub that has all of the features of an active hub (regenerates or amplifies the signal) with additional capabilities such as certain network management functions. What is a SMAU? SMAU stands for Smart Multistation Access Unit. while IBM says that it travels counter-clockwise. MIC (Media Interface Connectors) are connectors that have neither male nor female ends. They are also called hermaphrodite connectors.3 standard 15.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 14. 18. 20. Which way does data travel in a Token Ring network? Which way data travels in a Token Ring network is a matter of convention. Inc. It is more commonly set up to travel clockwise. Describe beaconing as it applies to Token Ring architecture. The active monitor (which is the first computer to go online) is responsible for monitoring network activity to make sure that frames are being sent and received accurately.

Specialized Solutions. 2. 315 . Inc. 23. It first goes to computer #1 and then #2. 4. etc. What is the number one reason for choosing a client/server network? The number one reason for using a client/server network is security. What type of access method is utilized by an ARCNet network? Token-passing. It does this even if computer #1 is at the opposite end of the network from computer #2. How does a computer on a LocalTalk network obtain its address? When a computer first comes online in a LocalTalk network it randomly selects an address from a range of allowable addresses. What are the two tools required to initiate a network design? All you need to start a network project is a pencil and some paper. 24.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 22. If no other computer is using the address. What are the two areas of concern when starting a network project? You will need to consider the customer and the network goals. NetBEUI is a non-routable protocol and will not interface with routers. 25. 5. It also provides a print server. What is the purpose of AppleShare? AppleShare is the name of the file server on an AppleTalk network. It then broadcasts the address to determine if any other computer on the network is using it. Review Questions Chapter 6 1. it stores it to use each time it connects to the network. 3. Is NetBEUI a good protocol to use with a large WAN? No. How does data flow in an ARCNet network? The token is passed around the network in numerical order. What are the two most prominent reasons to choose a peer-to-peer network? The best reasons for using peer-to-peer are its simplicity and low cost.

316 Specialized Solutions. 7. 9. having to maintain a variety of network cards will increase the workload of your IS department – it is better to standardize network cards in a large network.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 6. Review Questions Chapter 7 1. It will be less costly to install CAT 6 now than to replace the CAT 5 later when the network needs to be upgraded from 100 Mbps to 1 Gbps to handle the higher traffic. How do you know if a new piece of hardware will work with Windows XP? Check the Windows Catalog on the web at www. 2. What is the difference between an active hub and a passive hub? Active hubs are used to connect nodes and boost the signal strengths. Give one reason why you should recommend that he spend a little more now and install CAT 6 cabling instead of CAT 5. 8.com/windows/catalog. Why should you refuse this offer? First. you cannot be sure that they will meet the specifications of your network. but not enough to run it efficiently. Passive hubs are used only to make connections. Your client is installing a small Ethernet network and trying to save money at the same time. Was this a good purchase? No – the minimum requirements are just enough to run the NOS. Inc. Your accounting office found a really good deal on network cards. An active hub requires some input power. You are expanding your network and will need to invest in 50 to 100 new network cards. . Your company just bought ten new computers and all are guaranteed to meet the minimum requirements of Windows XP.microsoft. he intends to expand the network in the future. Also. but they are not all the same. However. What is the difference between a hub and a MAU? Hubs are used with Ethernet networks and MAUs are used with Token Ring networks.

PPP. but it can switch packets across multiple networks. SLIP. Auditing. Router . 10. They do not translate or filter any information. Think of a gateway as a computer that acts as a translator between two networks that don’t speak the same language. Repeater . They can also determine the best path for “routing” traffic and filter broadcast traffic to the local segment. Gateway .544 Mbps transmissions is called? T1 6. a router. A bridge can be used to isolate segments on a LAN. 5. Callback Security. Repeaters work in the Physical layer of the OSI model. and PPTP filtering. What are the two components of remote network accessing? RAS (remote access server) and DUN (dial up networking). What is analog communication? Analog communication is based on PSTN or public switched telephone network. and a gateway. Specialized Solutions. For example.A bridge does the same things as a repeater but has one additional feature.Gateways make it possible to connect different network architectures. NetBEUI is not routable. A form of digital line that is capable of 1. 8. Name three RAS protocols. Inc. a bridge. Not all network protocols will work with a router. In older modems. and SONET 7. Name four forms of RAS security. Bridges work in the Data Link layer of the OSI model. thus reducing the traffic for each segment. ISDN.A router has all the features of a bridge. BAUD rate is the number in cycles per second of the carrier signal of a modem. PPTP and L2TP 9. Name three advanced WAN environments. Security host. Frame Relay. BAUD is limited to 2400 bps. BAUD and bps were the same thing. Define a repeater. Describe the difference between BAUD and bps. They do however.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 3. amplify the signal thereby compensating for signal loss due to long cables. Bridge . 317 . A bps or bit per second is the actual data transmission rate of a modem.A repeater is a device that is used to extend the cable lengths of a network segment. 4.

and ARP. SMTP. What is the purpose of DNS? The Domain Name System is used to resolve host names into IP addresses.com.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 8 1. 5. Internet and Network Interface. SNMP. How many primary protocols are used to make the TCP/IP Suite? There are five primary protocols: they are – TCP. What is a domain? A domain is a group of computers that share a common general purpose. . Which of the name resolution services will work only in Windows? WINS 9. 2. What is the value of the leading bit (one on the far left) for a Class A IP address? Class B? Class C? Class A Class B Class C 318 01-126 128-191 192-223 (leading bit is 0) (leading bit is 1) (leading bits 11) Specialized Solutions. 8. Who is responsible for maintaining top-level domains? The InterNIC (Internet Network Information Center) is responsible for top-level domain names. IP. An example is http://www. 32 10. 3. 4. What is an FQDN and give an example? FQDN is a Fully Qualified Domain Name. Transport. HTU UTH 6. ICMP.microsoft. Inc. IPv4 addresses consist of a ______ bit number. FTP. Name three of the five other protocols used within TCP/IP Additional protocols are: POP3. What are the four layers that make up the TCP/IP protocol suite? The four layers of TCP/IP are: Application. and HTTP. 7. UDP.

You are the manager of a large network and have been getting complaints about the system being slow. NETSTAT and TRACERT. What kind of software package can you purchase to help analyze your network? Network Management Software is used to analyze network traffic and network status. each device will need to be _________ compliant. What are five reasons to use subnetting? Connect physically remote local networks Connect a mix of network technologies (Ethernet and Token Ring) Allow an unlimited number of hosts to communicate Reduce network traffic by limiting broadcast and local traffic to a single segment Review Questions Chapter 9 1. List as many as you can. U U U U 12. ROUTE. SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) 3. Event Viewer. Subnetting is the process of breaking an IP address into _________ and ________ groups Subnetting is the process of breaking an IP address into meaningful and manageable groups. 319 .Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers 11. NBTSTAT. 2. Specialized Solutions. TCP/IP provides several tools that you can use to validate the statistics of your network. Inc. In order for your new network management software to monitor the activities of the entire network.

What purpose does encryption play in your security model? Encryption encodes a message so that it cannot be read if it is intercepted during transmission. passwords are assigned to __________. 5. What is the function of a firewall? A firewall is used to prevent unauthorized access to your network from outside via the Internet.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Review Questions Chapter 10 1. 4. Resources 3. 320 Specialized Solutions. What are the three most common levels of RAID? RAID 0 Non-redundant striped array RAID 1 Mirrored arrays RAID 5 Striped array with parity 6. In a share level model. . What are the two requirements of user level logon? The user must type in a Username and a Password. 2. It can also be configured to prevent unauthorized transmissions from leaving your network. The acronym RAID stands for____________? Redundant Array of Independent Disks or Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks. Inc.

and Repair the Problem. Inc. 4. After repairing a problem. You need to know the IP address of a workstation. What are the three primary steps to take when troubleshooting? The three steps to troubleshooting are: Define the Problem. What TCP/IP utility can you use to find the IP address of the workstation? You can use IPCONFIG from a DOS prompt or if using Windows. The fox and hound. What tool would you need to find the short? TDRs (Time-Domain Reflectometers) are used to locate shorts in cables. 3. and think it might be shorted. are you finished with the troubleshooting process? NO – You still need to confirm the repair and document the problem and solution. 6. You have found the cabinet with the patch panel and hub. Isolate the Problem. 5. you should see the green light that indicates that the network card has detected the presence of a network. but need to know which of the 50 cables goes to the accounting office. You are working with a TCP/IP network and want to confirm the protocol stack in a specific workstation. What is the loopback IP address? 127. What is the easiest way to tell if the network card can “see” the network? If the network card has indicator lights. Specialized Solutions. 321 .0. WINIPCFG from the RUN command. You are troubleshooting a cable problem. 8. What would be the best tool to help you locate the cable in question? The best tool for isolating a single cable from many is the tone generator or tone locator.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers Review Questions Chapter 11 1.0. You have located the cable in question #3. You have just connected a workstation to the network. What utility can you use to confirm the protocol stack is good? PING the loopback IP.1 7. 2.

What is the difference between bandwidth and throughput? Bandwidth is the amount of traffic that a network can handle at a given time.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide 9. Throughput is the maximum speed that a message can be transmitted. Inc. 10. . What utility can you use to determine the performance of the server? Performance Monitor 322 Specialized Solutions. You have a Windows 2000 network and received complaints that the server is running slow.

52 Data Protection. 40. 108. 114 10BaseFL. 121 Application Layer. 253 Banyan VINES. 111 D Data Link Layer. 39 Circuit-switched. 38 Client Software. 86 Beaconing. 21 Carriers. 65 continuity. 96 brouter. 89 Direct Memory Access (DMA). 91 domain. 78 Boot Prom’s. 114 10Base5. 65 BNC. 226 Digital. 89 cloud. 196 Class C. 226 Bandwidth. 42 base memory address. Inc. 114 10BaseT. 70 coaxial cable. 323 . 61 C Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection (CSMA/CD. 92 Boot Sector. 164 Class A. 109 DES (Data Encryption Standard). 79 AWG. 123 ARP. 166 attenuation. 41 CSU/DSU. 191 BRI. 230 Differential backup. 60 attributes. 116 10Base2. 24 Address Resolution Protocol. 167 bridge. 13 Clocking. 16. 160 Category 3. 90 DLC. 86 Broadband Optical Telepoint. 39 AUI connector. 119 binding. 67. 69. 114 A access method. 189 domain controller.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers Index 1 100BaseX. 243 CSMA/CD. 34 DECnet. 60 Broadband. 196 Class B. 151 connection-oriented. 98 Change. 34 clients. 122 AppleTalk. 116 100VG-AnyLAN. 81 Cellular Networking. 78. 231 BOOTP. 40 Specialized Solutions. 108 Active Directory. 161 Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC). 42 active hubs. 89 AppleShare. 50 application server. 86 B backbone. 91 Baseband. 67 demand priority. 77 Computer compatibility. 70 DMA. 186 Analog. 13 ARCNet. 196 client software. 78. 109 CSNW. 79 backup utility. 217 ATM. 81 Category 5.

12 Laser.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide Domain Name Service (DNS). 185 IP address. 191 HTTP. 62 Internet Control Message Protocol. Inc. 42 Headers. 243 Group policies. 186 Internet Protocol (IP). 197 IPX. 39 IP. 83 IBM Type 3 UTP. 224 FPNW. 194 IPCONFIG. 249 IPsec. 191 dynamic routers. 83 File Infectors. 120 ICA. 81 environment. 191 gateways.. 22 FAT. 161 . 39 Full-Duplex. (IEEE). 41 H Half-Duplex. 67 IRQ. 186 Incremental backup. 91 IBM cabling. 21. 86 headers. 144 Ethernet. 60 E EES. 187 hubs. 39 fault tolerance. 68. 61 Gateways. 116 ground probe. 112 HOSTS file. 231 fire codes. 174 Line-of-Sight Infrared. 215 F Fast Ethernet. 56 324 Specialized Solutions. 86 G gateway. 166 fiber-optic. 217. 41 Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP). 174 ICMP. 86 firewall. 231 EISA. 185 interoperability. 245 DSMN. 192 IFCONFIG. 96 Institute for Electrical and Electronic Engineers. 96 Linux. 187 Full backup. 174 L L2TP. 42 GSNW. 114 EtherTalk. 167 ISDN adapters. 96 LAT. 187 HTTPS.Fiber Distributed Data. 159 Gigabit Ethernet. 71 ICS. 167 FTP. 70 Layer Two Tunneling Protocol. 93 EMI. 217 IMAP4. 226 Full Control. 18 I I/O port number. 91 ISA. 157 hybrid topologies. 226 Infrared. 174 IPv6. 189 Domain Reflectometer (TDR). 122 Event Viewer. Inc. K Kerberos. 226 FDDI . 93 ISDN. 174 LAN. 41 Frame Relay. 68.

120 Microwave. 192 Punch Down Tool. 23 Passwords. 64 proxy server. 232 Managing User Accounts. Inc.Primary Domain Controller. 34 MAU. 67 NDIS. 32 P Packet switching.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers LLC. 120 Multimeter. 93 PDC . 171 NWLink. 14 Peer-to-peer LANs. 231 physical topologies. 39 NOS – Network Operating System. 39 Null-Modem. 243 mesh topology. 190 NETSTAT. 217 NTFS. 36 NetWare Client32 for Macintosh. 228 NFS. 215 NetWare. 107 protocols. 18 LSL. 242 325 Specialized Solutions. 31 PGP. 249 plenum. 93 PCMCIA. 71. 67 modem. 120. 30 N NAT.Multiple Access Units. 114 Network Time Protocol (NTP). 157 PCI. 36 NetWare file server. 64 NDS (NetWare Directory Services). 52 Network Neighborhood. 243 multitasking. . 213 MIC (Media Interface Connectors). 151 Media Tester. 229 Patch Panel. 64 Open Systems Interface (OSI). 168 MSAU. 18 MHS. 41. 89 passive hub. 68 O ODI. 71. 191 LocalTalk. 36 NetBEUI. 172 PPTP. 31 Network standards. 157 MAUs . 217 PING. 29 OS/2. 49 operating system. 98 packets. 37 MIB (Management Information Base). 164 Packet-Radio Networking. 69 Network-attached storage (NAS). 30 PRI. 13 peer-to-peer. 172 Preemptive multitasking. 96 MLID. 36 NetWare Client32 for DOS. 167 protocol. 36 NetWare Client32 for OS/2. 29 NSLOOKUP. 67 M Macintosh. 215 NCP. 49. 89 Network Layer. 122 logical topology. 37 NetWare security. 191 NBTSTAT. 43 Macro Virus. 18 Ping. 67 No Access. 37 Network Adapter Cards. 114 LMHOSTS. 23 media access methods. 111 parallel communication. 86 PPP. 37 NetWare Print Services. 21 Media Compatibility. 69 NLSP. 70 NETBIOS. 36 NetWare Client32 for Windows 95.

67. 79 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). 228 STP. 167 SPX. 245 SONET. 34. 249 Trailer. 71 RSA. 51 Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP). 21. Inc. 35 Reflective Infrared. 171 removable disks. 11 signal bounce. 187 SNA. 60.Network + Training & Test Preparation Guide R Radio. 175 Security. 81 Subnetting. 77 Thinnet. 237 trunk. 96 relative humidity. 172 SMAU. 68 326 Specialized Solutions. 68 Satellite Station Networking. 71. 182 UNIX. 98 Scatter Infrared. 60 Storage Area Network (SAN). 34 server-based network. 185 UTP. 215 router. 152 star topology. 80 virtual connections. 16. 77 throughput. 120 SMB. 69 ROUTE. 225 removable optical disk. sneaker net. 65 RPC. 86 SLIP. 144 Remote Access Server or RAS. 144 Server Software. 60. 159 routers. 71. 39 redirector. 227 RARP. 42 User Datagram Protocol (UDP). 13 sharing applications. 187 Software analyzers. 16. 174 token passing. 79 thicknet. 89 Server room. 69. 16 serial communication. 213 Simplex. 215. 17 RIP. 68 SMDS. 33 servers. 217 Read. 79 Transport Layer. 232 troubleshooting. 80 V vampire taps. 69 terminator. 68. 58 . 199 T tape backup. 225 TCP. 16 TRACERT. 35 ring topology. 17 static routers. 112 transceiver. 158 requester. 16 twisted-pair. 11 SNMP. 253 TLS. 167 SMTP. 67 SSL. 225 repeater. 109 token ring. 221 segment. 68 Trojan Horses. 80 U UDP. 184 Telnet. 68. 118 topology. 96 RAID. 167 security. 174 Standards. 13 Server-based network. 230 S SAP. 96 SDH.

70 Specialized Solutions. 69. 12 Warp Connect.Appendix F – Chapter Review Questions and Answers Viruses. 71 XNS. 154 Windows 95/98. 124 wireless network. 242 Wireless. 19. 190 Wire Crimper. Inc. 166 XDR. 40 U U WINS. 165 VPN’s (Virtual Private Networks). 230 W WAN. 231 VLAN. 32 Windows 2000. 95 Wireless NICs. 92 workstation. 13 X X.25. 31 Windows for Workgroups. 31 Windows NT Print Servers. 327 .